Home

MODBUS(R)/TCP Interface Module User`s Manual

1. QJ71MT91 Third party PLC User application HMI Master slave function Master Master Master a on ABB E EF L Ethernet as ee m x y t t i H LE MODBUS TCP T S dg ial SES EN seriakgateway device Third party PLC User application Remote I O CNC QJ71MT91 Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave function m MopBUsOseiaw slave device i Third party PLC amr MELSECAA series PLC i AJ71UC24 S2 T Remote I O S gt Accessible from QJ71MT91 master function to each slave N f 1 9 EEE Accessible from each master to QJ71MT91 slave function 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 GX Developer connection a Accessible range of GX Developer Refer to Appendix 3 for the GX Developer connection setup examples Access path via QJ71MT91 GX Developer QJ71MT91 Connected PLC MODBUS TCP b Precautions for GX Developer connection When the QJ71MT91 and Ethernet module exist together on the same Ethernet access cannot be made between the QJ71MT91 and Ethernet module
2. 4 14 4 3 9 Read file record FC 20 SC 06 ceceeeseccecceseeseeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaesaeseaseaesaeseseaeeesseseateaes 4 15 A 6 A 6 4 3 10 Write file record FC 21 SC 06 tnter etre 4 17 43 11 Mask write register FO 22 4 19 4 3 12 Read Write multiple registers FC 23 nennen 4 20 5 FUNCTIONS 5 1105 15 SS P uneton tet eh ott onte Met tU to ttr be 5 1 oid Master FUNCIO et 5 3 5 2 1 Automatic communication 5 3 5 2 2 Dedicated 5 9 53 Slave FUNCUOMN fo pie et Saye Al eee ethene OL oe lata ee eee ee epee ee 5 10 5 3 1 Automatic response function 5 10 5 3 2 MODBUS device assignment function 22 5 11 5 4 KeepAlive Eunctlon iet E e o PUE RE QURE EQUI an E qu ir hoes 5 12 5 5 Router Relay Function cveng deieren kia aia iia a aia iieii a i 5 14 5 6 GX Developer Connection Function eesssssssssssssssssssee 5 15
3. 15 140 14 Cancel 3 After setting write the data to the PLC and power the PLC OFF then ON or reset the PLC CPU 6 10 6 10 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q Intelligent function module switch setting items Switch No Initial Value 1 in this Switch 1 Operation mode setting 0000H section n M 2 in this Switch 2 Communication condition setting 0000H section Switch 3 IP address setting high order C001H 3 in this Switch 4 IP address setting low order OOFEH section 1 The settings made with the intelligent function module switches become effective after power is switched OFF then ON or the PLC CPU is reset Setting change during operation is also not available 2 When the intelligent function module switch setting has not been made the initial values of each switch are used for operation For the operation method of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Operation mode setting Switch 1 Set the operation mode of the QJ71MT91 such as the online or offline mode Normal operation mode with the target 0000H Online Disconnects the local station from the network In the offline mode parameter setting cannot be executed 0001H Offline att Re Communication with the other station is not available either Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MT91 000DuH Hardware test
4. 4 3 Message length 4 3 MODBUS application data unit 4 3 MODBUS application header 4 3 MODBUS 0 4 Module Dis 4 3 4 Protocol data 4 3 Protocol ID 2 usce 4 3 header 4 3 Transaction ID sess 4 3 Foncion list oc terrere 5 1 Function version esee 2 6 GX 8 1 GX Developer Accessible range 5 15 GX Developer connection function 5 15 GX Developer connection information Setting c t c 7 16 GX Developer connection setup 5 15 GX Developer connection setup nce e prn App 5 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer 7 16 System monitor of GX Developer 11 10 Index 2 H Handling 6 1 Hardware 6 8 Head buffer memory address 7 21 Head coil 7 28 Head device
5. 3 1 Number of routers 7 13 Number of routers that can be set 3 1 Online change enable disable setting 6 13 Operating 8 4 Operation mode setting 6 11 Parameter setting method 7 1 Parameter setting procedures 7 2 Parameter 7 1 Part names unidad ns acp iate 6 4 PDU Tormats aded 4 4 Performance specifications 3 1 PING testinin 8 28 11 40 Preferred node 7 18 Preferred node specification IP address 7 18 Preferred node specification TCP CODI CLOTY s 7 18 Pre operational procedures and setting 6 2 Processing time App 2 Program example Program example for use in normal R System configuration ss 9 11 Program example for use in MELSECNET H remote I O network 9 29 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment 7 32 QJ71MT91 status confirmation 11 10 Relationship between COM ERR LED and signals eene 11 39 Relationship between PING test and I O Signals initiis 11 45
6. MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Exception code list An exception code is an error code commonly used for the MODBUS protocols which is embeded into a response message when the slave returns an exception response in reply to a request message from the master 1 Exception code storage location If the processing in the slave results in error completion the exception code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFFH of the buffer memory 2 Exception code list A list of the exception codes is given below i Corrective Action Exception Error Name Description Illegal function Illegal data address Illegal data value Slave device failure Slave busy Memory parity error Gateway unusable Gateway response failure Acknowledge The slave received an unsupported function code The specified address of the MODBUS device is abnormal The contents of the data part of the request message are abnormal A fatal error occurred while the slave was attempting to perform the requested action and the processing was impossible As the slave is executing other processing a long duration of time is required for completion of the request message processing As the slave is executing other processing the request message processing cannot be executed In the slave a parity error was detected at access to the extended file register The gateway device MODBUS TCP gt MODBUS ser
7. D11 Subnet mask pattern DMOVP HO D13 Default router IP address MOVP KO D15 Number of routers set DMOVP D16 Subnet address DMOVP HO 018 Router IP address MOVP D48 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection ZP REMTO J Ki K1 HO KO DO K49 M10 Transfers basic parameters to REMTO QJ71MT91 buffer memory instruction completion M10 MIT SET M20 Turns ON Basic parameter REMTO REMTO O setting command M200 when instruction instruction setting E completion result command ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Handling of ZP REMTO REMTO Manual Remote Network instruction error instruction result 9 PROGRAMMING M20 MOVP K502 D272 Parameter setting command MOVP K502 D273 K272 D272 K2 M30 REMTO instruction completion M30 M31 SET M40 REMTO REMTO Parameter instruction instruction setting completion result command corrective action for error completion referring Q REMTO Remote I O Network ISCO ae rete a kr e 2 result M40 MOVP K10 D276 Parameter setting command DMOVP H0C0010002 D277 MOVP K2 D279 ZP REMTO K1 HO K276 0276 K4 M50 REMTO instruction M50 M51 completion SET Y1001 REMTO instruction instruction completion result Take corrective actio
8. 7 Remaining area is ignored 10 5 10 5 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function 10 6 MELSEC Q MODBUS device data are read from and written to the slave specified in the target IP address of the control data The processing used in the automatic communication function can be performed from a sequence program at any timing A maximum of eight MBRW instructions can be executed simultaneously Any instructions attempted in excess of the limit are ignored Create a sequence program carefully so that the number of simultaneously executed MBRW instructions does not exceed 8 The Q71MT91 automatically opens a TCP connection with a target slave when this instruction is executed Whether TCP connection closing processing is performed or not can be selected in Execution type S1 0 of the control data When communication with the same target device is made frequently using the dedicated instruction setting TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion saves the time required for TCP connection opening for the subsequent instruction execution Whether the MBRW instruction is being executed or not and whether it is completed normally or not can be confirmed in the MODBUS exception code S1 2 and the completion device D2 and completion status indication flag D2 1 specified in the set data a MODBUS exception code Stores the exception code when the processing in the slave is completed
9. Startable Executable 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q d When the basic parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 2 gt b1 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters Communication starting conditions QJ71MT91 operation Module READY Default parameter Setting not made Basic parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters Basic parameter setting request Yi Basic parameter setting normal 1 completed Basic parameter existence MODBUS device assignment parameter Y8 setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter X8 setting normal completed Parameter setting operation MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence creation Basic parameter IMODBUS device assignment parameter creation Automatic communication function Master function Dedicated instruction Master function Slave function Function executability GX Developer connection Startable Executable Exception response no assignment parameters Re
10. 1 When the close option setting of the execution type S1 0 is TCP connection is closed after instruction completion TCP connection is closed after the dedicated instruction has been completed and the completion device D2 has turned ON If the dedicated instruction is executed again for the same target device during this TCP connection closing processing it is completed with an error When the execution interval of the dedicated instruction for the same target device is short set the close option to TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 2 Specify device number 1 as the device number However this does not apply to the file number and device number specified for the Read write file record 3 When access is made to the bit device coil input of the slave the fraction bit is handled as described below Read When the read access points are 35 points Read data storing device D1 Target slave device area 116640 to 116625 116656 to 116641 116704 to 116657 to Remaining area is masked by 0 Write When the write access points are 5 points Write data storing device S2 gt 5 lt Target slave device area gt e bF to bo Write bF to bO 300 EBEN gt LLL 122544 to 122529
11. 7 28 Head holding register number 7 28 Head input number 7 28 Head input register number 7 28 Head MODBUS device number 7 28 Holding 7 25 Holding register assignment 1 7 26 IK l O signals 1 2 2 2 dts 3 2 Indications of indicator LEDs 6 5 Initial setting sees 8 12 Input cR VE 7 25 Input assignment 1 7 26 Input registet et erre 7 25 Input register assignment 1 7 26 Intelligent function module parameters 8 6 Intelligent function module switch setting 6 10 Intelligent function module switch setting 6 11 Starting procedure for intelligent function module switch setting screen 6 10 IP address setting 6 14 IP reassembly timer value 7 8 KeepAlive function 5 12 7 11 KeepAlive interval timer value 7 11 KeepAlive resend 7 11 KeepAlive start timer value 7 11 Operation of KeepAlive function 5 12 To use KeepAlive function
12. Module READY 7 Basic parameter OFF setting request Yi Basic parameter OFF setting normal X1 completed Basic parameter OFF setting error 2 completed Basic parameter OFF x3 setting existence a M Basic parameter Error code i Error code 0 10 storage clear error code storage area eng Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program PR RAMMIN Le 2 MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for basic parameter setting a When setting the basic parameters with a sequence program set the basic parameter starting method b0 of the intelligent function module switch 2 refer to Section 6 6 to ON Start with the user set parameters b Turn ON Basic parameter setting request Y1 after Module READY X0 has turned ON c After Basic parameter setting request Y1 is turned ON to start the parameter setting processing do not turn ON OFF any other output signal Y signal until Basic parameter setting normal completed X1 or Basic parameter setting error completed X2 turns ON d When the basic parameter setting is completed with an error an error code is stored into the basic parameter error code storage area address C10H 3088 of the buffer memory Check the stored error code take corrective action and make a parameter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 for details of the error code e Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns ON when the defaul
13. Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer input area X1000 X1006 Z REMFR J1 HO K4352 D4096 K64 M300 Module Automatic REMFR READY communication instruction operation status completion M300 M301 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q F LL 4 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMER Manual Remote I O Network instruction instruction RA I de OE ERE a completion result lt lt Refresh processing Automatic communication operation status gt gt X1000 X1006 KX s A REMFR J1 K2 K1 HO K3104 D4092 K4 M320 Module Automatic REMFR READY communication instruction operation status completion M320 M321 M322 REMFR REMFR Normal instruction instruction processing completion result command M321 corrective action for error completion referring to l Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote Network instruction L ge ee MIS EU MT RST M322 Module Normal READY processing command Automatic communication operation status Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt X1000 X1006 M322 D4092 0 Mr wc Ni M401 Module Automatic Normal READY comm processing operation command status N1 M401 Program for normal automatic communicatio
14. 5 12 LED eei ete e ete ee 6 5 COM ERR eene 6 5 ERR Lidia ticae tis 6 5 6 5 OPEN irem bd 6 5 Rss 6 5 PUN S indt a 6 5 Index 2 EE 6 5 Local slave station port No 7 17 Master function 5 1 Master function performance App 2 Max number of modules 2 1 Maximum node to node distance 3 1 Maximum number of connections 3 1 Maximum number of parameter settings 8 3 Maximum segment length 3 1 MODBUS device MODBUS device assignment function 5 11 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage 11 14 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area 11 14 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting 6 13 MODBUS device assignment parameters EE ETSI MEA 7 23 MODBUS device assignment parameters details nane eise 7 26 MODBUS device sizes 7 25 MODBUS R device assignment parameter p 8 34 MODBUS device assignment parameter Settirig s art seni ett ere ge tie 9 7 I O signals for 5 9 7 Setting method esses 9 7
15. 0 2 None CSV file creating Serial No Ver The serial No section displays the serial No of the corresponding module The Ver section displays the function version of the corresponding module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 How to confirm the software version of GX Configurator MB The software version of GX Configurator MB can be confirmed on the Product information screen of GX Developer Starting procedure GX Developer Help Product information Product information Programming and Maintenance tool yy GX Developer Version 8 12N SW8D5C GPPW E COPYRIGHT C 2002 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED This Product is licensed to Name MITSUBISHI Company MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Co ProductlD List of version information on Add in software GX Configurato MB Version1 01B SW1D5C QMBU E Software version COPYRIGHT C 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Warning This product is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extension possible under the law 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter explains the QJ71MT91 s performance specifications I O signals for PLC CPU and buffer memory For general specifications refer to the
16. 0215 533 534 0217 535 Buffer Memory Address Set Value 0900 2304 009DH Y Output 0100 0901 0902 5 2306 0903 0 000001 512 points 230 230 230 7 0980 2432 OOA8H D Data register isters 0981 0982 0983 24 2433 2434 5 5500 points FOOOH User free area 5500H 0 400001 1024 points 09COu 2496 09C2u 2498 09C3u 2499 09 1 2497 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Devices used in program Application Module READY X1 Basic parameter setting normal completed Basic parameter setting error completed X3 Basic parameter setting existence X4 Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed Automatic communication parameter setting error completed QJ71MT91 ET X6 Automatic communication operation status input output MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed Basic parameter setting request Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request External input command Parameter setting command Y40 Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error External output f mu a Y41 Automatic communication parameter 2 communication error D400
17. GX Configurator MB is a tool designed to support sequence program creation necessary for the parameter setting auto refresh and monitor test of the QJ71MT91 8 1 GX Configurator MB Functions The following table lists the GX Configurator MB functions Reference Section 1 Setthe following items that require initial setting Basic parameters Automatic communication parameters Initial setting MODBUS device assignment parameters Section 8 4 The initially set data are registered to the CPU module parameters and automatically written to the QJ71MT91 when the CPU module enters the RUN status Set the QJ7 1MT91 buffer memory areas to be refreshed automatically Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operation status storage area Auto refresh setting TE User free area Section 8 5 The data of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory areas set for auto refresh are automatically read from written to the specified devices when the END instruction of the CPU module is executed Monitor test Monitor test the buffer memory and I O signals of the QJ71MT91 Various setting status module status X Y monitor test Monitor test Initial setting MODBUS device assignment parameter status Section 8 6 Automatic communication status Error log Communication status PING test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 2 I
18. Network address Local station QJ71MT91 IP address Class B 81H 05H 2 01 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 Subnet mask d 1 on nn B n n n n n n8 19 1 0 n8 8 8 85 1 1 o o o o o o o ojojo Target device 3 81H 5 29 02 address Class B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Set the subnet address of the target device 3 Subnet address Subnet address set value f Router information Router IP address Set the IP addresses of the routers to be used when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target devices on other Ethernets via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The subnet address of the router is the same as that of the local station QJ7 1MT91 Condition 3 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 1 The router relay function is not needed for communication when the slave function of the QJ71MT91 is used to make communication with the master device on another Ethernet 2 The router relay function is not needed in a system that uses the Proxy router 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 2 3 GX Developer connection information setting 1 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer con
19. Parameter setting procedures Are the parameters set using GX Configurator MB NO Set the basic parameter starting method b0 of the communication condition 2 setting Switch 2 to ON Refer to Section 6 6 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method b1 of the communication condition setting Switch 2 to ON Refer to Section 6 6 Set the basic parameters Refer to Section 8 7 1 9 2 9 3 Set the automatic communication parameters Refer to Section 8 7 2 9 2 9 3 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 8 7 3 9 2 9 3 7 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Write the parameters to the PLC CPU Reset and restart the PLC CPU YES Is COM ERR LED OFF NO NO Is X3 Basic parameter setting existence ON 1 Basic parameter error YES Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Will the automatic communication function be used NO YES Is X6 Automatic communication operation status ON 1 NO Automatic communication parameter error YES Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Is X0A MODBUS device assignment parameter Setting existence ON NO 1 lt MODBUS device assignment parameter error YES Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Para
20. The upper limit of the file number available for the QU71MT91 slave function is equal to the file register size of the mounted QCPU Refer to Section 7 4 4 a Specify the number of sub requests m so that the PDU protocol data unit size in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 m X7 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the request message is discarded b Specify the total read points of all the sub requests n1 nm so that the PDU protocol data unit size in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 2 X2 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the slave returns an exception response 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Sub request 1 Function code Number of Number of Reference Device data 1 Device data n1 14 response read bytes number data bytes n1X 2 1 06H 2 2 Number of read bytes n1X 2 1 14 1 Number of response data bytes m 2 NX 2 Sub request m Number of Reference Device data 1 Device data nm read bytes number 2 1 06 Y Number of read bytes nm X2 1 gt Number of response data bytes m X 2 NX 2 gt in the above diagram represents the total n1 of the device data When completed with an error Function cod
21. yk Number of bytes nx 2 gt The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the number of bytes 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Head holding register number Write points 10x The value same as in the head The value same as in the holding register number in the write points in the request request message is stored message is stored L When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 90H code 2 2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 9 Read file record FC 20 SC 06 Reads the values of one or more extended file registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 124 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Sub request 1 Function code Reference File number Read head device number Read points 149 of bytes number 00004 to FFFF 00004 to 270 ni mx7 064 00014 to 007 If Number of bytes mx7 Sub request m d a Reference File number Read head device number Read points number 00004 to 0000 to 270 nm 06x 00014 to 007 Number of bytes mX7
22. 1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Automatic communication parameter 1 192 1 0 2 Target station IP address Module ID 255 Repeat interval timer value Units 10ms Response monitoring timer value Units 500ms Type specification of the target MODBUS R device Read coils Read setting Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS R device head number Details IP Address input Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file End setup Cancel c MODBUS device assignment parameters Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters on the MODBUS R device assignment parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 c MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module model name QJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type 5 Seem Cg ae Coil assignment 1 Device 100 Head coil number Assignment points Coil assignment 2 Device Details Device input Make text file End setup When the MODBUS device assignment parameter screen is displayed it shows the initial values Delete unnecessary initial values 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Auto refresh setting Make auto refresh setting from the Auto refresh setting screen of GX Configurator MB Set the following items for the program example Module side Module side PLC side Setting Item Transfer word count Buffer offset Device Automatic communic
23. 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 96H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details This function code reads the value stored in the holding register from the slave and after AND OR processing in the master writes the masked value to the holding register of the slave Therefore when the holding register value is changed during AND OR processing the new value is overwritten 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 12 Read Write multiple registers FC 23 Reads and writes data from and to multiple holding registers Write is executed first and read is then executed Number of accessible devices with one message Read 1 to 125 points Write 1 to 121 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Data Function code Read head holding Read points Write head holding Write points Write device data 1 Write device data m 17H register number n register number m 1 0000 to FFFFH 0001 007DH 0000 to FFFFH 0001H to 0079H Tr Number of bytes m X 2 1 The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the nu
24. 90 5 0 mm pp nc pen ee Ui cte 1 Length between a hub and a node 2 Indicates the number of TCP connections that can be established simultaneously 3 Indicates the maximum number of slaves that can be communication targets 4 Indicates the maximum number of dedicated instructions that can be started simultaneously from a sequence program 3 1 3 1 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 2 I O Signals for PLC CPU This section explains the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 for the PLC CPU 3 2 1 I O signal list The following table shows the I O signals of the QU71MT91 The assignment of the I O signals is based on a case that the QJ71MT91 is mounted on slot 0 of the main base unit Device X represents an input signal from the QJ71MT91 to the PLC CPU and device 3 Y shows an output signal from the PLC CPU to the QU71MT91 Refer to the corresponding reference sections for details Signal Direction QJ71MT91 PLC CPU Signal Direction PLC CPU QJ71MT91 Module READY 1 ON Accessible se OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting normal completed Basic parameter setting request Section ON Normal completed ON Being requested 9 1 1 OFF OFF Not requested m Basic parameter setting error completed ON Error completed pud OFF DE Use prohibited Use prohibited Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set Automatic communication parameter setting r
25. Class Mask value Class A FF000000n Class B FFFFOOOOH Class C FFFFFFOOH 1 Networks constructed by Ethernet include small scaled network systems where multiple devices are connected to one Ethernet and medium and large scaled network systems where multiple small scaled networks are connected by routers etc The subnet mask logically divides one network where many devices are connected into multiple sub networks to facilitate administration Example Class B Network address 054 2F _ Ol IP address 1 1 1 110111111 1 Host address 01u m CE SEEN 05 2r 0h 1 0 1 loli lilii 0 0 0 00 IP address 1 All devices on the same sub network must have common subnet masks 2 When not administrated by the sub network the connected devices need not have subnet masks Set the network address of the corresponding class 7 PARAMETER SETTIN sae MELSEC Q c Default router IP address Set the IP address of the router default router to be used when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the router specified in the router information refer to e below Set the value t
26. Dedicated instruction interruption Device code error 11 23 The number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection or the total number of TCP connections set in the preferred node specification in the basic parameter is greater than 64 COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The magnitude relationships between various monitoring timer values and CPU response monitoring timer value set in the basic parameters Refer to Section 7 2 2 1 are incorrect The setting of the port No for automatic communication function in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the target slave port No for automatic communication function in the basic parameter is incorrect Erroneous data have been written to the system area 00314 to OOF 1H of the buffer memory The setting of the CPU response monitoring timer in the basic parameter is incorrect Failed in basic parameter setting because the GX Configurator MB parameters were being set at power on The setting of the port No for dedicated instruction in the basic parameter is incorrect The dedicated instruction being executed was interrupted by the basic parameter setting The device code value specified in MODBUS device assignment parameter is incorrect MELSEC Q ae Occurrence Error Name Lit LED Corrective Action 1 Review the setting of the number o
27. INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the MELSEC Q series PLC Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to develop full familiarity with the functions and performance of the Q series PLC you have purchased so as to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PREGAUTIONS 1 teret rete e ene Un PR rera fe eed A 1 REVISIONS 4 5 5 5 5 e dnd etel eru ee d aee ot d etit d a A 6 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction sse A 10 The Manual s Usage and Structure cccceccecceseeseeeeceeeeseeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseesaesaeseeseaneats A 11 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations cccceccecseeceececeeseeeeceeceeesaecaecaeeeaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeeaesaeeeeeaeeaes A 13 Meanings and Definitions of Terms trennen nnns trenes A 13 Product ConflguratlOni s cR erre temen ree n Le ite A 14 1 OVERVIEW 1 1101 5 tT Features ned E i e E p b t d el ed 1 1 l2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1t02 7 2 s niea ti tert ers i Pee Rie o eH tad e rele gs 2 1 2 2 Devices Necessary for Network Configuration essent 2 8 2 3 System Configuration and Access Range 2222 2 4 2 4 How to Confirm the Functio
28. Not requested Being requested 11 43 11 TR BLESH TIN PUPL OOIE MELSEC Q 7 Change the PING test execution request current value back to Not requested Because the PING test execution request current value does not automatically return to Not requested on completion of the PING test it must be manually changed to Not requested after the PING test is completed Select Not requested in the PING test execution request setting field and click the Execute test button When the processing is completed a Completed message appears PING test Module information Module model name 0 71 91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Communication tins check FING es Total packet transmission count e Fauecont 1 f Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input display Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 8 Confirm the PING test execution request current value The PING test execution request current value must be as shown below PING test execution request current value Not requested PING test completed current value OFF PING test Module information Module model QJ71MTS1 Start 120 No
29. Stop monitor Monitor Items Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Item Address Section OCFEnH Number of errors occurred 3326 Section 11 3 1 Detailed error code error code Exception code Function code ODOOH to ODFFH Error log 1 to 32 Local station port No 3328 to 3583 Target IP address Target device port No 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 5 Communication status Monitor Purpose Monitor the communication status by communication protocol Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen Communication status Monitor Screen Communication status Module information Module model name QJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value IP IP packet reception count 0 Count of IP packet reception discarded 0 due to sum check error Total number of sent IP packets Simultaneous transmission error detection count CMP ICMP packet reception count Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent ICMP packets Total number of ICMP echo request received Total number of ICMP echo reply sent Flash ROM setting Details Current value Cannot execute test display Monitoring Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Items Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Item Address Section 10 to 11 IP packet reception count 3600 to 3601
30. UDP receive data size error 11 34 Transmission was attempted using the connection not open The connection used to send data was already closed The connection being closed was used to send data Connection The connection not open was COM ERR Retry after a little while being closed used to send data The message greater than the TCP maximum size was received As the TCP ULP timer timed out the TCP connection was forcibly disconnected from the local station The TCP connection was disconnected forcibly from the target device This error may be ignored when no problems arise from this error The TCP connection was closed forcibly from the local station The local station uses 64 or more TCP connections Hence the TCP connection was closed forcibly to maintain the TCP connections available for simultaneous opening under frequently opened and closed conditions This error may be ignored when no problems arise from this error As a TCP protocol error was detected the TCP connection was closed forcibly The message greater than the UDP maximum size was received COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error md after a little while Rory aerate whe after a little while Check whether the operation status of the ta
31. remote master module Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data lt gt 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q WOFFC WOFFF w1000 W103F Output data MELSECNET H remote I O module Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data uu mE Configurator MB 3000H 12288 Automatic communication function buffer output area MELSECNET H remote l O station QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication function buffer input area Input data 64 words 1024 bits uu mE refresh 3A00H 14848 Output data 100 words 16383 Slave MODBUSY TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 Coil Bit register 000001 015001 Input data 1024 points 64 words 065536 MODBUS protocol Holding register Word register Output data 100 points 100 words 465536 PR RAMMIN e x MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment function The setting target QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 uses the MODBUS device assignment function Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the setting target QU71MT91 Assignment details Refer to Section 9 2 1 1 b for the assignment details 2 Parameter setting details a Basic parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 a for the basic parameter sett
32. steterit 7 23 7 4 1 MODBUS device BIZ OS qud coded citet dim Dua ape bebe Bs dua talline ase annans 7 25 7 4 2 MODBUS device assignment parameters details stt 7 26 7 4 3 Default assignment parameters sess nnne nnne 7 29 7 4 4 MODBUS extended file register assignimiehit s cocotte eere meni ete ne etate eet es 7 31 7 4 5 QU71MT91 buffer memory assignment essent nennen tette 7 32 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB 8 1to 8 35 8 1 GX Configurator MB Functions esses nennen tnnt nne tette tnnt 8 1 8 2 Installing and Uninstalling GX Configurator MB ssessssseseeeseeeeenne nennen 8 2 A 7 A 7 8 2 1 Precautions for use ooreen eri e Tenan AA T EEE AAA TEERAA TENAR TEC tren nnne etre 8 2 8 2 2 Operating environimeht pns 8 4 8 3 GX 5 8 5 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB sss 8 5 8 3 2 Operation Outline reise tete tH ded pede dL ae lated 8 8 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility esses 8 10 84 Initial Setting aaa ce a rtt e eed ek a ed te d a la eve a evel aa 8 12 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting 2 diretta teli d etate aeta 8 14 8 6 MONRO Test
33. 1 1 1 1 Response Processing Request Response Processing message time message message time Eo gt 3 t 1 1 i 1 EN 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 i 2 1 1 1 y MODBUS TCP Response Request Processing Response slave device message message time message App 2 App 2 APPENDICE MELSEC Q b Dedicated instruction performance MBRW MBREQ instruction 1 Dedicated instruction processing time Unit ms The dedicated instruction processing time is the time from when the dedicated instruction is started until the completed device turns on Tre 7 St St or Ts whichever is greater 2 Calculation items App 3 App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Slave function performance 1 Request message processing time Unit ms The request message processing time is the time from when the QJ71MT91 receives a request message from the master until it sends a response message after completion of processing 51 5 7 Xn1 St 2 2 Calculation items Setting Item Description Tsl Request message processing time St Local station scan time Any of the following values is applied depending on the function code and assignment status When QCPU device is assigned When buffer memory Function code 08 2 2 lt 9
34. 1 Indications of indicator LEDs Connector for connection of the QJ71MT91 to 10BASE 10BASE T 100BASE TX T 100BASE TX connector RJ45 1 The QJ71MT91 detects whether 10BASE T or 100BASE TX is used according to the hub 1 The LED on the connector is not lit 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Indications of indicator LEDs 1 QJ71MT91 RUN O C ERR INIT COM ERR 100M SDA RD RUN Operation status Normal completion of basic Basic parameter setting in INIT Initial processing status parameter setting progress or nonexistent TCP connection open Presence of open TCP Absence of open TCP Eres bani connection connection Data send in progress Data not yet sent E m Setting error status _ Emor Normal setting Communication error Communication error Normal communication in status occurrence 2 progress 100M 100Mbps 10Mbps or not connected RD Receive status Data receive in progress Data not yet received 1 For troubleshooting refer to Section 11 1 2 When the COM ERR LED has turned off refer to Section 11 4 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 4 Connection to Ethernet This section explains how to connect the QJ71MT91 to the 100BASE TX or 10BASE T network 1 Connection precautions The following are the precautions for connection of the QJ71MT91 Handle the QJ71MT91 correctly paying full attention to safe
35. 500ms 0007 KeepAlive start timer value 7 KeepAlive Set time set value 500ms 1200 Section 7 2 00084 KeepAlive interval timer value TCP UDP Set time set value 500ms iis ell RAN 9 H IP setting KeepAlive resend count a Rw inh Router relay function 000B4 to ee 000C p Subnet mask pattern FFFFFFOO 11 to 12 000D to 000E Default router IP address 13 to 14 d Routing Number of routers set L 001015 information H uad 16 to 17 Router pore to information 1 Router IP 18 to 19 address 0014 to Router DT information 2 to 8 GX 0030 Developer Number of TCP connections for GX Section 48 connection Developer connection ty RW 72 information p 5 setting 00314 to 010F System area use prohibited 49 to 271 Continued on next page 1 Indicates whether the address is readable and or writable from to a sequence program R Readable Writable 2 Indicates whether setting on GX Configurator MB is enabled or disabled Setting enabled X Setting disabled as router 1 PECIFICATI NS Auc MELSEC Q Read Initial Referen Address Application Name Initial Value Write Setting ED F1 gt 2 Local slave station port No Section Target slave port No for automatic 502 7 2 communication function R W 01124 to 0113 System area use prohibited 274 to 275 MODBUS CPU response monitoring timer value R W TCP Set tim
36. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual Application MODBUS TCP Interface Module QJ71MT91 GX Configurator MB Art no 155603 01 05 2004 A eee aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version B ersion e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual of the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions lt gt DANGER resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Design Precautions 4 DANGER e When controlling a running PLC modifying data
37. Refer to Section 6 5 1 Checks the hardware including the send receive circuits of 000 Self loopback test the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 5 2 A switch error error code 73014 will occur if the set value is other than the value indicated in the table If the switch error has occurred correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF and ON or reset the PLC CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 2 Communication condition setting Switch 2 Specify the starting methods the send frame and the online change enable disable setting Switch 2 b15 b4 b3 b2 bi b0 Specify 0 1 Basic parameter starting method 0 Start with the default parameters 1 Start with the user set parameters 2 Send frame specification 0 Data are sent in the Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame 1 Data are sent in the IEEE802 3 compliant frame Online change enable disable setting MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method 0 Online change disabled 1 Online change enabled 0 Start with the default parameters 1 Start with the user set 2 1 The information in this area is ignored However if the setting in this area is other than 0 a switch error error code 7302u occurs If the switch error has occurred correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF then ON or reset the PLC CPU x2 When setting par
38. Type specification of the target MODBUS R device No select Read setting Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS R device head number Details IP Address input Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file End setup Cancel 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Setting Items For the automatic communication parameter setting set the data format or setting range value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values Buffer Memory Reference Setting Item Address Section 0200 to 0201 Target station IP address 512 to 513 0202H 514 0203H 515 Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response 1 timer value 0205 Type specication ofthe target MODBUS device specification of the target MODBUS device 517 Automatic 2 0206 communication Head buffer memory address 518 setting parameter 1 0207H MN MODBUS device head number 519 Section 7 3 0208u Access ER 520 020 522 020 523 MODBUS device head number Access OHNE 0209H Head buffer memory address 521 Write setting Automatic communication YE 020 to O4FFH Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 parameter 2 to 524 to 1279 64 To make the automatic communication function active write the automatic communication parameters to the CPU module and subsequently power the PLC off
39. ul Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru SSMP Rosgidromontazh Ltd 23 Lesoparkovaya Str RU 344041 Rostov On Don Phone 7 8632 36 00 22 Fax 7 8632 36 00 26 e mail STC Drive Technique RUSSIA ul Bajkalskaja 239 Office 2 23 RU 664075 Irkutsk Phone 7 3952 24 38 16 Fax 7 3952 23 02 98 e mail privodGirk ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 72 10 Fax 7 095 790 72 12 e mail infoGprivod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 4 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
40. 2 Error completion of PING test a The execution result of the PING test is stored into the execution result area 5 When error completion arises the error code is stored For the corrective actions to be taken at error completion refer to Section 11 3 3 b Ifthe basic parameter setting request Y1 is turned ON during execution of the PING test the PING test results in error completion c If the PING test is executed with the basic parameter setting request Y1 ON the PING test results in error completion 11 45 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ee MELSEC Q 3 Program example An example of the PING test performed with a sequence program is given below a System configuration MOBDBUS TCP QJ71MT91 Slave device Master 192 1 0 1 H INR Ethernet 1 The QJ71MT91 is mounted on Slot 0 of the base unit and the head I O No is 0 b Program conditions This program executes a PING test when PING test execution request Y1C is turned on after the PING test conditions are set 1 PING test condition settings Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value 2 Communication time check 4064 S a 4 Transmission count 1 4065 4 times 0010001 IP address 2 to OFE3H 4066 to 4067 192 1 0 1 Devices available for user Data register U0 G4066 to IP address Intelligent funct
41. 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code 95H Exception code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details The slave QJ71MT91 will make a normal response if it receives this function code with the ZR device of the QCPU in a read only status In this case however Write File Record is not performed 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 11 Mask write register FC 22 Masks the value stored in one holding register with AND or OR and writes the masked value Number of accessible devices with one message 1 point The masked value is written to the holding register as described below Target register s current value AND mask value U OR mask value AND mask value write value When the OR mask value is 0000 only the AND processing of the AND mask value is performed When the AND mask value is 0000 the OR mask value becomes the write value 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Target holding register number AND mask value OR mask value 16H 0000 to FFFFu 0000 to FFFFu 0000 to FFFFH
42. 40 0 21 201 1148 e mail sirius siriustrading ro INEA d o o SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 email info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc aGcsc a kiev ua Electrotechnical RUSSIA Systems Siberia Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 22 03 05 Fax 7 3832 22 03 05 e mail infoGeltechsystems ru Elektrostyle ul Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscow Phone 7 095 514 9316 Fax 7 095 514 9317 e mail infoGestl ru Elektrostyle Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No 312 RU 630049 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 1066 18 Fax 7 3832 10 66 26 e mail infoGestl ru ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra
43. Dedicated instructions 5 9 Dedicated instruction list 10 1 Dedicated instruction performance App 3 Dedicated instruction processing time App 3 MBREQ Instruction 10 10 MBRW Instruction suesssss 10 2 Default assignment parameters 7 29 Default router IP address 7 18 Device code 7 27 D vice symbOL ea tete ttes 7 27 Index 1 E F G Error ler eea S 11 21 Error code storage areas 11 13 Error codes sesssseeeeee 11 13 Error log re 8 25 11 16 Error log area 11 16 Error log write 11 16 Ethernet function 5 1 Exception Code 1 11 19 Extended file register 7 25 External dimensions App 1 1 1 Fraction bits tco etd 7 22 Frame specifications 4 3 Application data 4 3 Ethernet 4 3 Sici ende t either tude 4 3 IP header iret 4 3 MBAP
44. GX Developer Ethernet module QJ71MT91 Ethernet MODBUS TCP mixed network 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 4 How to Confirm the Function Version and Software Version Confirm the function version of the QJ71MT91 and the software version of GX Configurator MB in the following methods 1 How to confirm the QJ71MT91 function version a When checking the SERIAL section of the rating plate on the side of the module The serial No and function version of the corresponding module are indicated in the SERIAL section of the rating plate MITSUBISHI MODEL u MAC ADD Serial No first5 digits Function version Conformed standard LI o o m a m a n ata MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IN JAPAN b When using GX Developer to confirm The serial No and function version are displayed on the Product Information List or Module s Detailed Information screen of GX Developer The following shows how to confirm the serial No and function version on the Product Information List screen Refer to Section 11 2 for the Module s Detailed Information screen Starting procedure Diagnostics gt System monitor Product Information List Product Information List slot Type series Model name Points I O No master PLC Serial No wer 0 0 Intelli Q QJ71MTS1 32pt 0000 0 1 None
45. MELSEC Q 10 18 X21 X0 x t 1 1 wv Do Execution type Dedicated Module Basic instruction READY parameter start setting command existence MOV DI Clears the complete condition to 0 MOV HO 2 Sets 0 fixed DMOV 000010002 3 Target IP address MOV K255 5 Module ID Station No MOV HO D6 Target slave port No MOV K100 D7 Response monitoring timer value MOV K7 D100 Request message size MOV H16 101 MOV H2 102 Request message MOV 103 MOV H8 D104 Z MBREQ UO 00 0100 0300 WO Dedicated instruction Z MBREQ MBREQ instruction completed MO M 0301 7 r 1 1H 1 Processing for normal completion normal response MBREQ MBREQ Exception se Eum MALE ie instruction instruction bit completed result D301 7 r i 1 H Processing for normal completion exception response Exception bit r 1 1 Processing for error completion MBREQ ES SS SS SS SS Se instruction result J Fen 10 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q This chapter explains the error details and corrective actions 11 1 Troubleshooting 1 hec Troubleshooting of errors indicated by LEDs Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section 1 Check the mounting status of the Switch the power off and remount the Section 6 1 QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 Check the power supply capacity Change the power supply module Section 3 1 RUN LED turned o
46. Monitoring timer setting error Preferred node specification setting error Subnet mask pattern setting error Default router IP address setting error Subnet address setting error Router IP address setting error Number of routers setting error KeepAlive setting error Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection setting error Local slave station port No error After power on with parameters preset by GX Configurator MB before Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns on parameter settings were done by any of the following Basic parameter setting request Y1 Automatic communication parameter setting request Y4 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 Any of the monitoring timer setting in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the preferred node specification in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the subnet mask pattern in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the default router IP address in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the subnet address in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the router IP address in the basic parameter is incorrect The net ID of the local station differs from the net ID of the router IP address The setting of the number of routers set in the basic parameter is incorrect The KeepAlive related setting in the basic parameter is incorrect
47. OE12u to OE13H Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error 3602 to 3603 Section 11 3 1 14 to OE 15H Total number of sent IP packets 3604 to 3605 m 2 to OE2BH Simultaneous transmission error detection count 3626 to 3627 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Item Address Section Receive error 2 to 0E31H ICMP packet reception count 3632 to 3633 Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check 0E32H to 0E33H error 3634 to 3635 OE34u to OE35u Total number of sent ICMP packets 3636 to 3637 f OE36H to 0E37H Total number of ICMP echo request received 3638 to 3639 OE38H to 9 Total number of ICMP echo reply sent 3640 to 3641 to 3642 to 3643 to Total number of ICMP echo reply received 3644 to 3645 50 to 51 TCP packet reception count 3664 to 3665 0 52 to OE53H Count of TCP packet reception discarded due to sum check error 3666 to 3667 54 to 55 Total number of sent TCP packets 3668 to 3669 OE70n to OE71H UDP packet reception count 3696 to 3697 0 72 to 7 Count of packet reception discarded due to sum check error 3698 to 3699 0 74 to 75 Total number of sent UDP packets 3700 to 3701 84 to 85 Framing error count 3716 to 3717 86 to OE87H
48. Setting 9 10 Timing charts for setting 9 8 MODBUS extended file register assignment T 7 31 MODBUS extended file register size 7 31 MODBUS standard functions 4 1 Mask write register 4 19 Read 4 6 Read discrete 4 7 Read file record 4 15 Read holding registers 4 8 Read input registers 4 9 Read Write multiple registers 4 20 Write file 4 17 Write multiple coils 4 12 Write multiple registers 4 14 Write single coil esses 4 10 Write single 4 11 Index 3 MODBUS TCP setting 7 17 IN O P Modules Divi ot ten tete nns 7 20 8 16 Multiple CPU system 2 2 Network configuration 2 3 Number of cascade connection stages 3 1 Number of errors occurred 11 16 Number of occupied I O points
49. The setting of the number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection in the basic parameter is incorrect The setting of the local slave station port No in the basic parameter is incorrect Lit LED COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR MELSEC Q When using parameters set by GX Configurator MB do not make parameter settings by Y signals before Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns on after power up Review the monitoring timer setting Review the setting of the preferred node specification Review the setting of the subnet mask pattern Review the setting of the default router IP address Review the setting of the subnet address Review the setting of the router IP address Review the setting of the number of routers set Review the KeepAlive related setting Review the setting of the number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection Review the setting of the local slave station port No Continued on next page 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Number of TCP connections setting error Timer setting magnitude relationship error Port No setting error for automatic communication function Target slave port No setting error for automatic communication function System area setting error CPU response monitoring timer setting error Basic parameter setting failure Port No setting error for dedicated instruction
50. User Switching are not supported 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 3 GX Configurator MB Operations 8 3 1 Common operations of GX Configurator MB 1 Usable control keys The following table shows the special keys available for GX Configurator MB operations and their applications Application When entering data to a cell cancels the newly entered value Closes window Moves the control space within a window Used in combination with the mouse to make multiple cell selections in test selection Delete Deletes the character at the position of the cursor When te ee cells clears all the setting contents Back Space Deletes the character at the Deletes the character at the position of the cursor of the cursor Moves the cursor 1 page up Moves the cursor 1 page down Accepts the value entered in the cell 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 2 Creating data with GX Configurator MB The following data file created using GX Configurator MB can also be used for GX Developer operations Fig 8 1 shows how the data files are handled in operations Intelligent function module parameters a Data created using the initial setting or auto refresh setting are saved in the intelligent function module parameter file in the project created with GX Developer Project I Program L Parameters PLC parameters Network parameters Intelligent function module parame
51. b As the target MODBUS device head number set last 5 digits of actual device number 1 Example Set 17 when the head number of the holding register is 400018 c When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 7 PARAMETER SETTIN Sau MELSEC Q 8 Access points Read setting Write setting a Set the number of points to be written to the MODBUS device and the number of points to be read from the MODBUS device b The access points change depending on the type specification of the target MODBUS device Type Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Access Points Setting Range Set value Read target Write target Points to be read Points to be written 0100 1to2000 points 0200 1to2000points Not specified D 0400 Input register 1 to 125 points 0500 Holding register 1 to 125 points ee 5 0001 9 Coil 1to 1968 points Not specified 0005H Holding register fe eet il 1 to 123 points 0505H Holding register Holding register 1 to 125 points 1 to 121 points In the access to the bit device coil input of the slave the fraction bits are handled as described below 1 Bit device read Automatic communication parameter Read setting Type specification of the Head buffer memory Target MODBUS device 1 Access points target MODBUS device address head number 1 Input 1000 16628 lt QJ7
52. error completed ON YES Basic parameter error NO Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Is X5 Automatic communication parameter setting error completed ON YES lt Automatic communication parameter error gt Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 s X9 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed ON lt MODBUS device assignment parameter error Take action according to troubleshooting Refer to Section 11 1 2 Parameter setting completion 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 2 Basic Parameters 7 2 1 Basic parameters details Address The basic parameters are classified into the following three types 1 TCP UDP IP setting TCP UDP IP monitoring timer Parameter Name TCP ULP timer value Set time set value x 500ms Setting Range 2 to 2400 MELSEC Q Initial Value TCP zero window timer value Set time set value 500ms 2 to 2400 TCP resend timer value Set time set value x 500ms TCP end timer value Set time set value 500ms 2 to 2400 2 to 2400 IP reassembly timer value Set time set value 500ms 1 to 2399 Split reception monitoring timer value Set time set value 500ms 2 to 2400 KeepAlive KeepAlive 0 Not used 1 Used KeepAlive start timer value Set time set value x 500m
53. of the slave device tothe master _ Masks the value stored in one holding register with AND or Section 4 3 11 OR and writes a value Reads and writes values from and to multiple holding Read write multiple registers Section 4 3 12 registers simultaneously Reads values from the holding registers in FIFO queue 24 1 Read FIFO Queue structure Read device identification Reads the module identification information of the slave EST CEU 1 The QU71MT91 slave function does not support this function Mask write register However it can be issued from the master QJ71MT91 by use of the MBREQ instruction 2 The function codes 07 08 11 12 and 17 are the functions dedicated to the MODBUS serial protocol 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 2 Standard function support list by master and slave functions The following table indicates a standard function support list classified by the master and slave functions of the QJ71MT91 Master Function Function Code i Function Automatic MBRW instruction MBREQ Slave Function Sub Code communication I 4 instruction function Red ____ Wo 02 Readdiscrete inputs 1 gt o 09 Redmodngedses Readinputregisters o o J o 05 Write Singlecot_ x x O oss Write Single Register o7 1 2 Readexceptionstaus x x o x okrea Dia
54. products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical ap
55. set the value in hexadecimal 3 CPU response monitoring timer value a When the QJ71MT91 receives a request message from the master and the PLC CPU starts its processing the QJ71MT91 waits for the response from the PLC CPU The time allowed for the QJ71MT91 to wait is set by the CPU response monitoring timer value This timer allows the QJ71MT91 to cancel the wait status on the master Side when a response to the master is not available due to an error occurred in the PLC CPU Master device Request Normal response Request Exception response QJ71MT91 A 2 3 CPU response _ monitoring timer Start Reset Start Timeout CYRUS EAR AEG el te ei ae bas Ws te ACE CC EN tet PLC CPU Processing Error occurred 7 PARAMETER SETTIN au MELSEC Q b The QJ71MT91 starts the CPU response monitoring timer when it receives a request message from the master 1 in the figure The CPU response monitoring timer monitors the PLC CPU processing until the QJ71MT91 starts sending a response message to the master 2 in the figure c When the CPU response monitoring timer reaches the preset time the QJ71MT91 performs the following processings 3 in the figure 1 Issues the error code 7380 1 2 Issues the exception code 04H to the master side 2 1 Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code 2 Refer to Section 11 3
56. with an error b Completion device D2 Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBRW instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing c Completion status indication device D2 1 Turns ON OFF depending on the status of the MBRW instruction completion Normal completion Remains OFF Error completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBRW instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing 10 6 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Operation for MBRW instruction execution END END END END processing processing processing X processing Sequence program u M 4 MBRW instruction Completion device D2 Completion status indication device D2 1 Error 10 7 Completion of MBRW ON instruction execution b OFF dads Sood i M NN EM Normal completion 4 1 scan OFF 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the error completion signal D2 1 turns ON and the error code is stored into the complete condition area 51 1 When the processing in the slave is completed with an error the exception code is stored into S1 2 According to the error code and exception code check the error and take corrective action referring to the following manual Error code gt 4FFFHorless CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspecti
57. 1 Online change enable disable setting Online change enabled b2 1 Send frame specification Data are sent in Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame b3 0 Switch 3 Set the upper half of the IP address 001 Switch 4 Set the lower half of the IP address 0001H 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters from the Initial setting screen of GX Configurator MB a Basic parameters Set the basic parameters on the Basic parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 a Switch 2 Basic parameter Module information Module model name QJ 71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBLIS R Module Setting item Setting value TCP UDP IP setting TCP ULP timer value Units 500ms TCP zero window timer value Units 500ms TCP resend timer value Units 500ms TCP end timer value Units 500ms IP reassembly timer value Units 500ms Split reception monitoring timer value Units 500ms Keep live Keep live start timer value Units 500ms Details Decimal input Setting range 2 2400 Make text file End setup POINT When the basic parameter screen is displayed it shows the initial values 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Automatic communication parameters Set the automatic communication parameters on the Automatic communication parameter screen Set the values shown in Section 9 2 1 2 b Automatic communication parameter Module information Module model name 71
58. 2 2 No setting is required when the default value is used d TCP end timer value 1 When TCP connection is closed from the local station the local station sends FIN to the target device and receives ACK and then FIN from the target device Set the monitoring time for which the station will wait for FIN from the target device 2 If FIN is not received from the target device when the TCP end timer is expired RST is sent to the target device forcing the connection to close 3 No setting is required when the default value is used e IP reassembly timer value 1 In data communications a block of data may be split into segments on an IP level due to the send receive station buffer limitations 2 Setthe time for waiting for the next split data segment in the case where the QJ71MT91 receives and restores the split data 3 No setting is required when the initial value is used 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q f Split reception monitoring timer value 1 Setthe time from the receipt of the first message segment until the receipt of the last message segment in the case where messages split on a TCP UDP level are received 2 No setting is required when the default value is used 1 Specify the QJ71MT91 side timer values that will satisfy the following conditions 1 Automatic Split reception TCP ULP TCP end TCP IP communication response gt monitoring gt timer gt timer gt resend gt reassembly monit
59. 3 Since Station No and Routing parameter transfer method are not used leave them as displayed on the screen PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module Network No Station No 1 address IP input format 28 0 Host Name Routing parameter transfer method Automatic response system c Other station Select Other station Single network d Network route 1 Select Ethernet and double click it to display the Network communication route Detailed setting of Ethernet screen 2 Select Access to Ethernet module set on PLC side I F on the Network communication route Detailed setting of Ethernet screen Other station in The same Toop or access to multilevel system Cancel Network No Station No App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSEC Q MEMO App 8 App 8 INDEX 5 A 5VDC internal current consumption 3 1 ACCOSS POINTS egit 7 22 Applicable 2 1 Assignment 7 28 Auto refresh setting 8 14 Automatic communication condition 8 23 Automatic communication function 5 3 Automatic communication function buffer ite ieri tee me e date 5 7 Automatic communication function communication time App 2 Automatic
60. 3326 to 3583 Slave function Error log area SEE IO MEIN 9 3326 to 3583 to ODFF GX Developer connection Error log area e 3326 to 3583 Communication status Communication status of each protocol E UNE p 3600 to 3727 1 Basic parameter error code storage area a When an error occurs with the basic parameter setting request Y1 signal ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area Automatic b The error code is stored when the basic parameter setting error completed X2 signal turns ON c The error code is cleared when the basic parameter setting normal completed X1 signal turns ON 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 2 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area a When an error occurs with the automatic communication parameter setting automatic communication start request Y4 signal ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area b The error code is stored when the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 signal turns ON c The error code is cleared when the automatic communication parameter setting normal completed X4 signal turns ON 3 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area 11 14 a When an automatic communication parameter error occurs with the automatic communication parameter setting automatic communication start request Y4 signal ON the automatic communication parameter numb
61. 9 2 3 Program without using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking Switch setting on lt lt I O assignment of GX Developer For the program example set intelligent function module switches as described below Intelligent Function Setting Detail Set Val etting Details et Value Module Switch i Switch 1 No need to set initial value online Basic parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters 60 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters b1 1 Online change enable disable setting Online change enabled b2 1 Send frame specification Data are sent in Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame b3 0 Set the upper half of the IP address Set the lower half of the IP address 1 Set 0006 to start with the default basic parameters 2 Set 0005 to start with the default MODBUS device assignment parameters 3 Set 0004 to start with the default basic and MODBUS device assignment parameters Switch 2 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters using a sequence program Parameter setting can be omitted under the following conditions Parameter Setting Omitting Condition Parameter Condition Setting method With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the basic parameter starting method bit Basic parameters Use the default para
62. Check whether the router operates normally Check the router communication path for any error Check the communication path ahead of the router for any error Review the IP address of the target device at the time of transmission Check whether the target device with the specified IP address exists on the line or not As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the IP reassembly timer value of the target device COM ERR Review the IP address of the target device at the time of transmission Review the setting of the routing information Review the setting of the subnet mask pattern COM ERR COM ERR Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the TCP ULP timer value of the basic parameter Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error COM ERR COM ERR Continued on next page 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IL MELSEC Q ode Connection not open 7453H 74544 TCP receive data size error TCP ULP time out error TCP connection forcibly disconnected TCP connection forcibly disconnected TCP protocol error
63. Coil 093F assignment Same as coil assignment 1 2308 to 2367 210 16 0940 2368 os Massen E 0942 assignment H 1 A 2370 0943 R 2371 b 0944 to Input 097F assignment Same as input assignment 1 2372 to 2431 MODBUS 2to 16 0980 device Section 0981 parameter Input 2433 register Head device number RW 0982 assignment 2434 1 Head input register number 0983 Input 0984 to register 9 assignment 2436 to 2495 2 to 16 E m m m Holding 09C4 to register O9FF assignment 2500 to 2559 20 16 0A00 to OBFF System area use prohibited 2560 to 3071 ae Switch 1 Operation mode setting status 0C01 Intelligent Switch 2 Communication condition setting Section 3073 function status module 6 6 0C02 Setting module Switch 3 Local station IP address setting switch Section 3074 status switch status statis 11 2 0C03 setting Switch 4 Local station IP address setting 3075 status status 0C04 i 3076 System area use prohibited Continued on next page Same as input register assignment 1 Same as holding register assignment 1 3 6 3 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Address Application Name Initial Value Write Setting pads 1 gt 2 Section 0C05 Module LED ON 6 3 3077 status LED ON status status Section 11 2 0C06 to OCOF System area use proh
64. Configurator MB Setting from a sequence program is also available Refer to Section 9 1 3 Refer to Section 7 4 for details of the MODBUS device assignment parameters b As the MODBUS device assignment parameters the default assignment parameters are available Refer to Section 7 4 3 for the default assignment parameters master device PLC CPU QJ71MT91 Slave function f Sequence i program an NE CESS ALY ne MODBUS evice assignment parameters Device memory MODBUS device D299 400499 D300 D300 K 400500 Request message holding register 400500 read request um D301 Wi 400501 Response message holding register 400500 12341 Ethernet 5 FUNCTIONS 5 4 KeepAlive Function 1 2 MELSEC Q KeepAlive function When communication with the target device whose TCP connection is open is not made for a predetermined period of time a KeepAlive ACK message is sent from the QJ71MT91 to the target device The alive status of the target device can be checked by whether a response message is returned or not to that ACK message 7 1 1 The connection may be disconnected if the target device does not support the TCP KeepAlive function unable to respond to the KeepAlive ACK message To use KeepAlive function To use the KeepAlive function set the KeepAlive of the basic parameter to Used Default Used The followi
65. Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions Installation Precautions 4 DANGER e Use the PLC in the operating environment that meets the general specifications described in the user s manual of the CPU Module to use Using the PLC in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module e To install the module securely insert the module fastening latch on the lower part of the module into the fastening hole of the base unit If the module is not installed properly it may cause the module to malfunction fail or fall off Secure the module with screws especially when it is used in an environment where constant vibrations may occur e Be sure to tighten the screws using the specified torque If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e Do not directly touch the conducting parts of the module This may cause the module to malfunction or fail N CAUTION e Before mounting or dismounting the module make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to do so may damage the module Wiring Precautions N CAUTION e Before starting installation wiring work etc of the module make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to d
66. GT PEE NE TN Index register Indexregser z occ lofo e pe a d User free area 2 3 1 The device assigned to the extended file register is fixed to the file register ZR Refer to Section 7 4 4 for the extended file register 2 Refer to Section 7 4 5 for device assignment to the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 3 Only this device is supported when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station An error will occur if an access request is received from the MODBUS TCP master with any other device assigned 4 Corresponds to LB and LW on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 2 Head device number As the head device number set the head device number of the PLC CPU device memory or the head address of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device 3 Head MODBUS device number Head coil number Head input number Head input register number Head holding register number a As the head MODBUS device number set the head number of the MODBUS device of the assignment target QJ7 1MT91 b Use the following expression to find the set value of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of MODBUS device number to be set 1 Example Set 5139 when the MODBUS device number is 105140 The head MODBUS device number must not be duplicated in assignment 1 to 16 Set different head MODBUS device numb
67. ICMP packet reception count Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent ICMP packets Total number of ICMP echo request received Total number of ICMP echo reply sent Total number of ICMP echo request sent Total number of ICMP echo reply received TCP packet reception count Count of TCP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent TCP packets UDP packet reception count Count of UDP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent UDP packets Framing error count Overflow count CRC error count Address 10 11 3600 to 3601 OE12u to OE13 3602 to 3603 14 to OE15 3604 to 3605 2 to 2 3626 to 3627 to 1 3632 to 3633 OE32u to OE33 3634 to 3635 4 to 5 3636 to 3637 to OE37 3638 to 3639 8 to 9 3640 to 3641 to 3642 to 3643 to 3644 to 3645 50 to OE51u 3664 to 3665 OE52u to 53 3666 to 3667 54 to OE55x 3668 to 3669 OE70du to 0 7 1 3696 to 3697 OE72u to 7 3698 to 3699 74 to OE75 3700 to 3701 84 to 85 3716 to 3717 86 to 87 3718 to 3719 88 to 89 3720 to 3721 b When 2 words are exceeded a count stops at FFFFFFFFH 4294967295 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN
68. Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 120 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value ommunication time check ransmission count address 182 1 0 2 Being requested en wo m is e esult Execution result Total packet transmission count Success count Total packet tanmision count Suxescam i 1 Flash ROM setting Details Current value IP Address input display Monitoring Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file Stop monitor 4 Conduct a PING test Select Being requested in the PING test execution request setting value field and click the Execute test button When the processing is completed a Completed message appears and the PING test is executed PING test Module information Module model name GJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Communication time check UE Don E M35 tr FING test executonrequest Narewesed gt Total packet 0 1 Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input display Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 11 42 11 42 11 TR BLESH TIN PUPL OOIE MEL
69. Module side Module side Module side Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operating condition 1 to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Refer to Section 8 5 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 1 Online Monitor test Select monitor test module screen Select monitor test module Select monitor test module Start 1 0 No Package name poon odule model name QU71MT91 Module implementation status Start 1 0 No Module model name QJ71MT91 Monitor test Enter Start I O No and Select Package name and Module model name Monitor Test screen Monitor Test Module information Module model QJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value 4 MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 Operation mode setting status Online Switch 2 Communication condition setting status Default parameter Basic parameter starting method MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting Default parameter method Online change enable disable Disable Send frame specification
70. Monitor jonitoring Cannot execute test Make text file _ Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 4 Communication status Communication status Module information Module model QJ71MTSI Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item IP IP packet reception count Count of IP packet reception discarded 0 due to sum check error Total number of sent IP packets Simultaneous transmission error detection count ICMP ICMP packet reception count Setting value Count of ICMP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent ICMP packets uU Total number of ICMP echo request received 0 Total number of ICMP echo reply sent 0 Flash ROM setting Details Curent value display Monitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Stop monitor Refer to Section 8 6 5 8 19 PING test Module information Module model name QJZIMTST Module type MODBUS R Module MELSEC Q Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Current value Setting value PING test execution request Being requested PING test completed Result Execution result Total packet transmi Success count Failure count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details m Monitoring Decimal input Setting range 2 60 Execute test Ref
71. ON When the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed signal X9 has turned ON correct the corresponding parameter in the following procedure 1 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area address 0C14H to 0 15 3092 3093 to identify the erroneous parameter 2 Refer to the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area address 0C13H 3091 to check the error details and correct the parameter 3 Make a MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 1 for details of the MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area and MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence XA turns ON also when the default parameters exist The MODBUS device assignment parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 00014 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 0000 f The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response to the master if it receives a 9 MODBUS device data read write request message from the master before the MODBUS device assignment parameters are set normally MODBUS device assignment parameter setting via a sequence program can be made again at any time after power up of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 6 1 for d
72. Overflow count 3718 to 3719 OE88n to OE89H CRC error count 3720 to 3721 Total number of ICMP echo request sent Section 11 3 1 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 6 PING test Monitor Test Purpose Display the execution and result of a PING test Refer to Section 11 5 for details Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen PING test Monitor Test Screen PING test Module information Module model name GJZ1MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Communicationtime check 1 0 2 Dun n address 0 0 0 0 0 Being requested Total packet transmission count Em Success count f Failure count Flash ROM setting Details Current value Decimal input display Monitoring Setting range Make test file 2 60 Stop monitor Execute test Monitor Test Items Buffer Memory Reference OFEOH Communication time check 4064 Transmission count E EN US 2 to OFE3H IP address 068 0 4067 to 4067 PING test execution PING test execution request PING test completed p Section 11 5 OFE4n Execution result 4068 5 Total packet transmission count EE Result E g 4071 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 7 Parameter Setting Using GX Configurator MB 8 7 1 Basic parameters Setting Purpose Set the ba
73. PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q c When the basic parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 2 b1 1 Start with the user set parameters MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Communication starting conditions QJ71MT91 operation Module READY X0 Parameter setting operation Basic parameter setting request Basic parameter Basic parameters Default parameter setting Basic parameter starting method 0 Start with the default parameters setting normal xi 7 completed Basic parameter X3 Power existence OFF then MODBUS Mdevice ON assignment parameter yg PLC setting request M CPU MODBUS device reset assignment parameter X8 MODBUS device assignment parameter creation setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence Function executability Automatic communication function Master function Dedicated instruction Master function Slave function GX Developer connection Request message not acceptable Exception response 77777 labe assignment parameters Request message acceptable
74. Reduce the number of simultaneously connected connections Check if the total number of TCP As the connection resources are all connections specified for use with assigned to the preferred nodes the preferred nodes is within 64 other nodes cannot communicate Section 7 2 Delete the unnecessary preferred node specifications 11 7 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IL MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section 7 Communication Check the target device Take corrective action if the target interval time with e Check for errors device has any problem the slave by the e Check whether the target device is automatic ready for operation communication Check the line status Correct the line status if it has any function is longer problem in traffic than time setto Check for any TCP connection Check that the target device is the repeat interval disconnected automatically by the operating normally Section 5 4 timer KeepAlive function Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value Section 7 2 Dedicated and KeepAlive interval timer value instruction requires Check if the number of TCP connections Retry as TCP connections may fail a long time to be connected simultaneously is within 64 temporarily completed TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be closed automatically when the Section 3 1 connection resources become Section 7 2 insufficient Specify the nodes
75. Repeat interval timer value 7 20 Index 3 Request message format 4 4 Request message processing time App 4 Response message format 4 4 Response monitoring timer value 7 20 Router information Router IP address 7 15 Router information Subnet address 7 13 Router relay function 5 14 7 12 To use router relay function 5 14 Routing information esses 7 12 S Self loopback 6 9 Send frame specification 6 12 6 13 Set values of default assignment parameters E en ER PR 7 30 Slave function esses 5 1 Slave function performance App 4 Software 2 2 Software version esses 2 7 Split reception monitoring timer value 7 9 Starting Intelligent function utility 8 10 Subnet mask pattern 7 12 rep Er 6 11 Nep 6 12 SWICK T 6 14 Switch 6 14 System configuration 2 1 2 4 Target MODBUS device head number 7 21 Target station IP address
76. X10 is set data are stored into X10 X1F The devices available for MELSECNET H remote I O modules are M B D and W 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file of screen data in a text file format End setup Accepts the set values and ends the setting Cancel Discards the set values and ends the setting 1 The auto refresh setting is stored as the intelligent function module parameters After data have been written to the CPU module the auto refresh setting is updated when the PLC is powered off and then on RUN or the CPU module is reset RUN The auto refresh setting cannot be changed from the sequence program However processing equivalent to the auto refresh can be added by the instruction of the sequence program 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 Monitor Test Monitor Test Purpose From this screen start the monitoring or test of the operating status I O signals parameter setting status automatic communication status error log communication status of the QJ71MT91 and perform PING test Starting Procedure Select monitor test module screen Start I O No Module model name Monitor Test Enter the start number in hexadecimal Package gt This screen can also be started from System monitor of GX Developer Version 6 or later Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual for details Monito
77. a new error occurs 8 Error log area a Up to 32 latest errors are stored into the error log area as an error history Error Log Area Name Number of errors occurred Error log write pointer OCFFH 3327 0D01H Exception code ee Error log 1 ER ODO3H Local station port No 3331 0004 to 0005 IP address 3332 to 3333 ODO6H 3334 0008 to ODFFH 3336 to 3583 im o device port No Error Errorlog 210 32 asinerorlogt 2 to 32 as in error log 1 b Number of errors occurred 1 The number of errors entered into the error log is stored 2 If 65536 or more errors have occurred the count stops at FFFFH 65535 c Error log write pointer The number of the latest error log is stored 0 No error no entry of error log 1 to 32 Error long number where the latest error log is entered 11 16 11 16 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN AL MELSEC Q d Error log error log 1 to 32 The error log area stores the 32 latest errors The error log area stores the errors in order of occurrence starting from the error log 1 f 33 or more errors have occurred the error logs are overwritten starting from the area of the error log 1 Function Master function Contents GX Developer Automatic Slave function Others NR Dedicated instruction connection communication Stores a code corresponding to the error occurred at any timing such as during processing of a request message from the m
78. and ground the exposed shield section on the widest contact surface as shown below Shielded twisted pair cables Shield See 2 for grounding of the shield 2 Grounding of shield of shielded cable a Ground the shield of the shielded cable as close to the module as possible to avoid the electromagnetic induction from ungrounded cables b Take an appropriate measure so that the stripped shield section can be grounded to the control panel in the largest area as possible A clamp may be used as shown below In this case however mask the contact part when painting the inner surface of the control panel to allow it to contact with the clamp rs Shield section Screw Paint mask Shielded cable Note Grounding by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Crimp terminal The Manual s Usage and Structure How to use this manual This manual describes the pre operation procedure functions etc by use of the MODBUS interface module QJ71MT91 on a purpose by purpose basis Refer to the corresponding section when you need to know the following 1 Features Chapter 1 Chapter 1 describes the features of the QJ71MT91 2 System configuration Chapter 2 a Section 2 1 describes the applicable PLC CPUs and compatible software packages b Section 2 2 descr
79. assignment 7 459392 Not used NU CON LU ES 7 461441 2048 0 to 2047 r Holding register assignment 8 463488 N 465536 7 29 7 PARAMETER SETTIN sau MELSEC Q Set values of default assignment parameters Assignment Name te Head MODBUS Assignment Device symbol number device number 1 points Coil assignment1 900Hto0903H Y 0 Coil assignment 6 0914 to 0917H 0093H F 0000H 38912 2048 Coil assignment 7 0918H to 091BH 00A1H SB 0000H 40960 2048 Coil assignment 8 091CH to 091FH 0094 0000 43008 2048 Coil assignment 15 0937H to 093AH 00C4H CS 0000H 63488 2048 Coil assignment 16 093BH to 093FH 0000H 0000H Input assignment 1 0940H to 0943H 009CH X 0000H Input assignment 2 to 16 0944Hto 097FH 0000 E 0000H oo oin e l i 8192 20480 Holding register assignment 9 to 16 4 09 o o 1 Use the following expression to find the set value of the head MODBUS device number Head MODBUS device number Last 5 digits of MODBUS device number to be set 1 2 User free area The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response to the master if the master requests access to a device outside the PLC CPU range or to outside the user free area of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 4 MODBUS extended file register assignment 1 MODBUS extended file register assignment The assignment of the MOD
80. auto refresh i 7 D4096 to D4159 Automatic communication function buffer input area D5000 to D5099 Automatic communication function buffer output area D9100 Automatic Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error D9101 code Automatic communication parameter 2 Continued on next page 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Special link relay Special link register Other station parameter status For interlock between local and other stations For MC instruction For automatic communication parameter setting Internal relay For automatic communication function REMTO instruction For instruction completion Basic parameter setting command Automatic communication parameter setting command MODBUS device assignment parameter setting command REMFR instruction For instruction result REMTO instruction For instruction completion M401 For automatic communication parameter 1 M402 communication normal For automatic communication parameter 2 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Program using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking on lt lt assignment of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 2 1 for the intelligent function module switches 2 Parameter setting Set the parameters from the Initial setting screen of GX Configurator MB a Basic parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 a for the basic parameter set
81. auto refresh setting GX Configurator MB refer to Refresh processing in 6 b 5 Automatic communication function a Fora program example for normal automatic communication refer to Processing for normal automatic communication in 6 b b Fora program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of automatic communication error gt gt in 6 b 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote master station local station and remote I O station other station The following example shows communication program interlocks using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station station No 1 47 H KE 9 4n0 SB47 Local station baton pass status B49 H cq SB49 Local station data link 9070 0 status 2 SW70 Other station baton pass 5074 0 status p n SW74 Other station data link 5078 0 H status lt SW78 Other station parameter 16 ia 7 communication status M AF r g if wc No m SB20 Network module status Set the fo
82. by connecting peripheral devices to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer to the intelligent function module configure an interlocking circuit in a sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is always maintained Also before performing other control operations modifying program and changing operation status on the running PLC be sure to read the manual carefully and thoroughly confirm the safety Especially in the above mentioned control operations that are performed from an external device to a remote PLC any problems on the PLC side may not be dealt with promptly due to a data communication error In addition to configuring an interlocking circuit in a sequence program determine how the system handles data communication errors etc between the devices and the PLC CPU Do not write any data in the system area Use prohibited of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Also do not output turn on the use prohibited signal which is one of the output signals from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module If data is written to the system area Use prohibited or the use prohibited signal is output there is a risk that the PLC system may malfunction N CAUTION e Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other
83. by the project saving operation of GX Developer save them into the file on the above intelligent function module parameter setting module selection screen Reading and writing the intelligent function module parameters from and to the PLC using GX Developer a After the intelligent function module parameters have been saved into the file read from PLC and write to PLC are enabled b Set the target PLC CPU by choosing Online Connection Setup on GX Developer c When mounting the QJ71MT91 on a MELSECNET H remote I O station use Read from PLC or Write to PLC of GX Developer Confirmation of required utility On the intelligent function module utility setting screen the start I O is displayed but the model name may be displayed as This indicates that the required utility has not been installed or the installed utility cannot be started from GX Developer By choosing Tools Intelligent function utility Utility list on GX Developer confirm and set the required utility 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB 8 4 Initial Setting MELSEC Q Setting Purpose Set the parameters on the initial setting screen This setting eliminates the need for parameter setting in the sequence program The initial setting parameters are as follows Basic parameters Automatic communication parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters Starting Procedure Start I O No gt Package name Module model
84. code into D3088 when setting fails Handling of ZP REMFR instruction error 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q Automatic communication parameter setting M100 X1000 X1003 X1006 M FMovP D512 H300 Initializes automatic n OL communication parameter setting command setting operation area existence status Automatic comm unicalion p Ss seas ea o ee a eae tt pr parameter 1 lt Read coils gt DMOVP 0010002 D512 Target station IP address T 1 i MVP K255 D514 Module ID i 1 i MOVP 1200 0515 Repeat interval timer value i 1 i 1 MOVP X K60 D516 Response monitoring timer value 1 i 1 i MOVP H100 D517 Type specification of the target i MODBUS device ove 1100 D518 Head buffer memory address Read setting 1 T wovP 15000 0519 Target MODBUS device head number 1 1 F M wewousm me Access points Automatic communication 4 parameter 2 DMOVP 0 0010002 0524 Target station IP address Write holding registers ye 15 Module ID 1 1 0527 Repeat interval timer value K60 0528 Response monitoring timer value i 1 i i H5 D529 Type specification of the target MODBUS device 1 1 pa o H3A00 D533 Head buffer memory address 1 1 1 1 Write
85. data Settin Settin Device Item Set Data B 3 Range Side bi bO User 1 1 Close option Bit 0 Execution type Set whether a TCP connection will be closed or not after instruction completion 0 TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 1 TCP connection is closed after instruction completion A condition when instruction is completed is stored Complete condition 0 Normal completion Other than 0 Error completion error code Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code An exception code from the slave is stored MODBUS 0 Slave processing normally completed exception code Other than 0 Slave processing completed with an error exception code Refer to Section 11 3 2 for details of the exception code lt S1 4 gt S1 3 gt Set when a request message is sent to the slave without the MODBUS TCP interface via the MODBUS serial gateway etc When the destination of the request message is the MODBUS serial gateway Module ID the set values are as described below 0 to 255 User 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 Station number of MODBUS serial slave Set 255 when the destination of the request message is the slave having the MODBUS TCP interface DOR Specify the port No of the target slave SG 9 P 0 Sent to No 502 11065535 User 1 to 65535 Sent to the set port No 9 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slav
86. i sno nion nnde Re 8 16 9 6 1 XY MonitOt eSL orte ete nere dede E edi rect d ede ge eer ty 8 20 8 6 2 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter condition 2 2 8 22 8 6 3 Automatic communication condition nennen nennen nnne 8 23 9 64 Emor logs rur ur dl tre e re e elo a ret ee e et e e e eos 8 25 8 6 5 81 1 enne 8 26 8 6 6 PING teSt hiss N 8 28 8 7 Parameter Setting Using GX Configurator MB sse nnne 8 29 8 7 1 Basic parameters i 2 8 ee i ee eee did d c i d d i hee ds 8 29 8 7 2 Automatic communication parameters sssssssssesseeseeenenee nennen nennen nnns 8 32 8 7 3 MODBUS device assignment parameters stt 8 34 9 1 Parameter Setting 1 aep e dett ete ge dene Le doen 9 1 9 1 1 Basic parameter Settlng 5 nities dit hacen ditties 9 1 9 1 2 Automatic communication parameter setting sse 9 4 9 1 3 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting sssssttn 9 7 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration sse 9 11 9 2 1 System configuration and program conditions 9 11 9 2 2 Program using utility package sss nennen nennen nennen nennen 9 18 9 2 3 Program wi
87. is completed 3 7 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IL MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section 3 Slave function of Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on This section QJ71MT91 does 1 4 not return Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment response assignment parameter setting existence parameter setting existence signal message to signal XA is on does not turn on This section 2 9 request message Check whether the basic parameters Restart the automatic communication were re set during reception of a request function after basic parameter re setting message is completed Section 7 2 The slave function stops when the basic parameters are re set Check whether the QJ71MT91 has Confirm the exception code and take ection 11 3 returned an exception code or not corrective action Refer to the error log area OCFEu to Take the corresponding corrective Section 11 3 ODFFu and confirm the error code action Is the request message sent to the Correct the request message issued by QJ71MT91 correct the master Check the following for the message length The application data unit length in Ethernet frame is 6 or more From Chapter 4 Transaction ID to Message length in MBAP header The MBAP header length 6 equals the application data unit length in Ethernet frame Refer to Communication with target devic
88. is sent from the communication target slave the automatic communication function does not stop until Automatic communication stop request Y6 turns on 5 When the automatic communication function stops the TCP connections used by the automatic communication function are all disconnected 3 Automatic communication operation status Confirming automatic communication operation status Use Automatic communication error status X7 to confirm the automatic communication operation status Automatic communication error status X7 turns on error occurs when any bit in the automatic communication operation status storage area 0C20 to 0C23 is on error occurring Automatic communication function is normal Automatic communication error status X7 is OFF Automatic communication function is faulty Automatic communication error status X7 is ON Refer to Section 11 3 1 6 for the automatic communication operation status storage area Obtaining error code at automatic communication error When the automatic communication function is erroneous check the error code and take corrective action 1 Acquisition of automatic communication parameter number during error occurrence When the automatic communication function is erroneous check the automatic communication parameter number of the part having an error in the automatic communication operation status storage area 0C20 to 0C23 2 Error code confirmation
89. over Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error If this occurs at execution of the dedicated instruction set TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion in the close option of the execution type If the number of connections used exceeds the maximum 64 bring it within the range Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Retry after a little while Continued on next page 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See I MELSEC Q Error Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Erorneme The send receive processing Send receive 29 Perform the basic parameter was forcibly interrupted by the 7306 processing COM ERR setting processing after the 4 basic parameter setting A interruption send receive processing is over processing Retry after a little while If this error occurs at execution Error during Transmission through the of the dedicated instruction set close connection being closed was COM ERR TCP connection is not closed processing attempted after instruction completion in the close option of the control data Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Failed to open the TCP Check the open status of the 7 target dev
90. parameter setting settin command command M200 KO gt KO 0 42 REMTO HO K2304 02304 255 M201 Transfers MODBUS device ddr assignment parameters to completion QU71MT91 buffer memory M201 M202 Y1008 Turns ON MODBUS device REMTO instruction completion REMTO instruction result assignment parameter setting request Y1008 when ZP REMTO instruction is M202 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network instruction result Le ee ee a aaa na anan a S ana i pan a a S a J completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q X1008 yow 3 Turns OFF MODBUS P device MODBUS assignment parameter setting parameter request Y1008 when setting is normal completed normally completed 009 X RST Y1008 Turns OFF MODBUS device MODBUS assignment parameter setting device request Y1008 and stores error parameter Setting code and parameter setting result error completed into D3091 when setting fails K3091 03091 K3 M211 REMFR instruction completion M211 M212 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q 4 EL Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Handling of ZP REMFR REMER I Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction instruction L JA completion result 9 PROGRAMMING
91. parameters The other software can only perform Monitor Test Screen switching method for multiple utility softwares When screens for multiple utility softwares cannot be displayed on one screen use the task bar to bring the desired screen to the front most scc e 5 series GX Devel Egintelligent Function Modul E lintettigent function M 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 6 Number of parameters that can be set in GX Configurator MB CPU modules and MELSECNET H remote I O stations in the MELSECNET H network system have a limit on the number of parameters that can be set by GX Configurator for intelligent function modules Installation target of intelligent Maximum number of parameter settings function module Initial setting Auto refresh setting Q00J 200 201 CPU Q02 Q02H Q06H Q 2H Q25HCPU Q12PH Q25PHCPU 512 256 MELSECNET H remote I O station 512 256 For example if multiple intelligent function modules are installed in a MELSECNET H remote I O station make GX Configurator setting carefully so that the number of parameter settings of all the intelligent function modules does not exceed the maximum number for the MELSECNET H remote I O station The total number of parameter settings is calculated separately for the initial setting and for the auto refresh setting The number of parameter settings that can be set for one module in GX Configurator MB is as shown below Target Module Init
92. setting kg D534 Target MODBUS device head i number 1 1 D535 Access points RST M100 Turns OFF Automatic c communication parameter setting command M100 KO gt Le Transfers automatic KO 3 r REMTO K1 HO K512 D512 K24 communication parameters to instruction QJ71MT91 buffer memory completion M101 M102 i SET Y1004 Rice a aere ARN setting REMTO REMTO h instruction instruction request automatic communication completion result start request Y1004 when ZP REMTO instruction is zuo mu ere ee ee ese completed normally M102 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Handling of ZP REMTO REMTO Manual Remote I O Network instruction error instruction ain aan J result 9 PROGRAMMING X1004 RST Y1004 Automatic comm parameter setting normal completed SET M200 Parameter setting command X1005 RST Y1004 Automatic comm parameter setting error completed ZP REMFR HO K3089 03089 K2 M111 REMFR instruction completion Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q M111 M112 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMFR Manual Remote 1 Network instruction instruction ee LLL ee ee ee completion result 9 45 Turns OFF Automatic com
93. the function code not supported by the QJ71MT91 slave function was received The request message of the sub code not supported by the QJ71MT91 slave function was received The MODBUS device assignment parameters have not been set for the MODBUS device specified in the received request message The range of the MODBUS device specified in the received request message is outside the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting range The range of the MODBUS device specified in the received request message exceeds the maximum value of the MODBUS device The maximum value of the extended file register is 10000 and that of any other MODBUS device is 65536 The access points of the MODBUS device specified in the received request is greater than the maximum access points of the corresponding function The write points of the received request message does not match the specified byte count The write device data size of the received request message does not match the specified byte count The reference number value specified in the received request message FC 20 FC 21 is incorrect COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Confirm the function code supported by the QJ71MT91 slave function and review the request message to be sent Confirm the sub code supported by the QJ71MT91 slave function and review the request mess
94. the excess bits turn to 0 When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 82H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 3 Read holding registers FC 03 Reads the values of one or more holding registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 125 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head holding register number Read points 034 00004 to FFFFu 00014 to 007D 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data Fart Device data 034 read bytes nx2 1 Number of read bytes nx 2 TIE y gt 1 For example when 4 the number of read bytes is 4 x 2 8 bytes When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 83H code x2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 4 Read input registers FC 04 Reads the values of one or more input registers Number of accessible devices with one messa
95. the sequence Section 9 1 2 signal X6 does program not turn on Check if the automatic communication Refer to Automatic communication This section parameter setting error completed parameter setting error completed signal X5 is on signal X5 turned on Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on Check if the basic parameter setting Refer to Basic parameter setting error em error completed signal X2 is on completed signal X2 turned on 11 3 11 3 Automatic Refer to the automatic communication the corresponding corrective action communication parameter error code storage area and retry 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 5 Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Check the automatic communication Restart the automatic communication Section 7 3 stop request function Section 5 1 1 Automatic communication operation status signal X6 turned off COM ERR LED status signal X1B turned on MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence signal XA does not turn 11 4 Check whether the basic parameters were re set while the automatic communication function was active The automatic communication is stopped when the basic parameters are re set Refer to COM ERR LED turned on Check whether the slave function is used or not Check if the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting has been completed Check if the
96. utility 2 Utility list r 7 Customize keys Pst Change display color r Options Create start up setting file Tools Intelligent function utility Start Intelligent function module parameter setting module select screen Intelligent function Module utility D MELSEC GP E Ele Online Tools Help Intelligent function module parameter setting module select Start 1 0 No 0000 Package name MODBUS R Module model name QJ71MTS1 Intelligent function module parameter setting module Auto refresh ER 0 Module model name Initial setting Auto refresh 0000 0 71 91 Unavailable Refer to Section 8 3 3 Initial setting Module information Module model QU71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Basic parameter Automatic communication parameter Basic parameter Automatic communication parameter M ODBUS R device assignment parameter MODBUS R device assignment Details Make test file End setup Refer to Section 8 4 Enter Start I O No and select Package name Module model name Auto refresh Auto refresh setting screen Auto refresh setting Module information Module model name QU71MTS1 Statl 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module MELSEC Q
97. utomatic communication function buffer Section 4096 to 8191 input area 5 2 1 2000 i dini EE Automatic 3000 to communication function 3FFF buffer Automatic communication function buffer Section 12288 to output area 5 2 1 16383 4000 to 4FFF ii 16384 to System area use prohibited 20479 5000 to ib User free area 0 R W x rA 24575 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QU71MT91 4 1 MODBUS Standard Function Support List 1 MODBUS standard function support list The following table indicates a list of the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QU71MT91 Sub Code d Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more coils Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more inputs 2 Best eges Reads te values of one or more holing registers Sedion4di Read input 0516 8 Reads the values of one or more input registers Section 4 3 4 Writes a value ON OFF to one coil is Ste lot alae needing rages ___ _ Seon sas OT 2 EUG 08 1 2 Diagnostics The diagnostics results are returned to the master 11 1 2 Fetch comm event counter Gets the communication event counter 12 1 2 Fetchcomm eventlog Gets the communication eventlog Writes values ON OFF to multiple coils G7 1 2 Report slave I D Reads the type status etc
98. when the QJ71MT91 receives a response message from the slave until it sends a next message to the slave b Overlap of send and receive processings may cause delay and take more time than the interval time set to the repeat interval timer c When the repeat interval timer value is 0 the QJ71MT91 will issue a next request message immediately after it has received a response message from the slave d The accuracy of the repeat interval timer is to 10ms Response monitoring timer value a The response monitoring timer value represents the time from when the QJ71MT91 issues a request message to the slave until it receives a response message from the slave b If the QJ71MT91 does not receive a response message from the slave before the response monitoring timer expires it judges the target slave as faulty When an error status occurs the corresponding automatic communication operation status storage area in the buffer memory turns on in the QJ71MT91 Also the error code is stored in the automatic communication error code storage area Refer to Section 11 3 1 for details of the automatic communication operation status storage area and automatic communication error code storage area c When the response monitoring timer value is 0 the QJ71MT91 operates at 60 30s 7 PARAMETER SETTIN au MELSEC Q 5 Type specification of the target MODBUS device a Set the type of the read write target MODBUS device b15 b
99. whether a TCP connection will be closed or not after instruction User completion 0 TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 1 TCP connection is closed after instruction completion A condition when instruction is completed is stored 0 Normal completion Complete condition Other than 0 Error completion error code NISI to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error code fixed valve o user Set the IP address of the target slave IP address 192 1 Target IP address Refer to 1 User b7 b7 M S Set when a request message is sent to the slave without the MODBUS TCP interface via the MODBUS serial gateway etc When the destination of the request message is the MODBUS serial gateway the set values are as described below Module ID 0 to 255 User 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 Station number of MODBUS serial slave Set 255 when the destination of the request message is the slave having the MODBUS TCP interface 1 al Specify the port No of the target slave 0 i d a 0 Sent to No 502 1 to 65535 User 1 to 65535 Sent to the set port No 3 Specify the time for monitoring a response from the target device slave 500ms Response increments monitoring timer 0 60 30s Ada m User value 2 to 2400 Set value Response monitoring timer value Set value 500ms 1 Setthe value that satisfies the following conditions Cond
100. 0 to D4003 Automatic communication operation status storage area parameter 1 to 64 D4008 to D4071 Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication operation status storage D4092 to D4095 area parameter 1 to 64 For auto refresh D4096 to D4159 D5000 to D5099 D9001 D9002 Data register D9003 D9004 Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Basic parameter error code acquisition Automatic communication parameter error code acquisition Automatic communication parameter setting result acquisition MODBUS device assignment parameter error code acquisition MODBUS device assignment D9005 Error device type parameter setting D9006 Error assigned group No result acquisition D9100 Automatic Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error D9101 M M For MODBUS device assignment parameter setting command Internal relay M401 Automatic communication M402 normal For automatic communication parameter 2 coda Automatic communication parameter 2 For automatic communication parameter setting command For automatic communication parameter 1 Continued on next page PR RAMMIN ases S MELSEC Q Application UO GO to U0 G19 U0 G48 U0 G272 to U0 G273 U0 G276 to U0 G279 U0 G512 to U0 G520 U0 G524 to U0 G529 U0 G533 to U0 G535 U0 G2304 to U0 G2307 U0 G2432 to Basic parameter setting area Au
101. 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input display Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Make text file Stop monitor 11 44 11 44 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Program example for use of sequence program This section explains how to perform a PING test from a sequence program 1 Relationship between PING test and I O signals a Turn ON the PING test execution request Y1C to execute the PING test 1 in the figure Data set for PING test Communication time check 1s Transmission count 4 times PING test data creation address 192 1 0 1 PING test execution request Y1C 3 PING test X1C completed PING test in execution Communication time check period 1s 5 Normal Normal Exception Normal PING test results QJ71 MT91 response response response response Execution result 0000H Total packet transmission count 4 times Success count 3 times Failure count 1 time Normal response is identified when the response of the PING test is received within the communication time check period b On completion of the PING test the PING test completion X1C turns ON 2 in the figure c Turn OFF the PING test execution request Y 1C to turn OFF the PING test completion 1 3 in the figure
102. 08 to 7 ODFF Error log 2 to 32 Same as error log 1 x EAM 3336 to 3583 ae Continued on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial OS Pd ce reo Section OEO0 to H W Ethernet Ethernet OE02 Local station Ethernet address 3584 to 3586 umm e mm el 0E03 to OEOF System area use prohibited 3587 to 3599 OE10 to OE11 IP packet reception count 3600 to 3601 Section 11 3 1 0E12 to Count of IP packet reception 0E13 discarded due to sum check 3602 to 3603 error OE14 to 0E15 Total number of sent IP packets 3604 to 3605 OE16 to 0E29 System area use prohibited 3606 to 3625 ek 9 Simultaneous transmission error 0 x Section H i H 3626 to 3627 detection count 11 3 1 OE2C to OE2F System area use prohibited 3628 to 3631 0E30 to 0E31 IOMP packet recepton ount IOMP packet recepton ount reception count 3632 to 3633 2 to Count of ICMP packet reception 0E33 discarded due to sum check 3634 to 3635 error 10 C Communi Total number of sent ICMP EHI H ommuni cation packets 3636 to 3637 cation status by to status Mies Total number of ICMP echo Section H e 3638 to 3639 yp cuf request received 11 3 1 DE b Total number of ICMP echo H 3640 to 3641 reply sent Total number of ICMP echo H 3642 to 3643 request sent i Total number of ICMP echo 3644 to 3645 reply received OE3E to OE4F System area use prohibite
103. 1 27 Lit LED In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the data size in the MBAP header of the received response message is greater than 254 bytes or less than 2 bytes COM ERR In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the module ID in the MBAP header of the received response message does not match the request message COM ERR In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the function code of the received GOMER response message does not match the request message In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the contents of the received COMERR response message does not match the request message The automatic communication function stop request Y6 was made with the automatic COM ERR communication function stopped The automatic communication parameter setting Y4 was COMER made with the automatic communication function ON The response monitoring timer timed out in the automatic COM ERR communication function The response monitoring timer timed out in the dedicated COM ERR instruction Since the basic parameters have not yet been set the dedicated instruction cannot be executed The dedicated instruction cannot be executed due to the offline mode COM ERR The CPU response monitoring timer timed out in the slave COM ERR function MELSEC Q On the target slave side check whether th
104. 1460 bytes on the same line with no router relayed and the TCP split transmission count is as described below When QJ71MT91 send message size S 1460 bytes n 1 When 1460 bytes lt QJ71MT91 send message size n 2 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Example 2 TCP split transmission count for communication on the other line The Maximum Segment size is a minimum of 536 bytes on the other line e g via a dial up router and the TCP split transmission count is as described below When QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 536 bytes n 1 When 536 bytes lt QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 1072 bytes n 2 When 1072 bytes QJ71MT91 transmission message size S 1608 bytes 3 3 When a communication error occurs due to noise etc change the setting to increase the retry count The retry count is determined by the following expression In the case of the default value 2 60 20 1 s tet ROE UCE vale i count TCP resend timer value 7 PARAMETER SETTIN au MELSEC Q 2 KeepAlive function a KeepAlive 1 Setwhether the KeepAlive function will be used or not Setting name Setting Not used KeepAlive function is not used Used KeepAlive function is used 2 No setting is required when the default value is used b KeepAlive start timer value 1 Setthe time interval from the stop of communication with the target device to the start of alive check for the TCP connection opened wit
105. 1MT91 buffer memory Target slave device area 629 o 5 116640 116625 116656 116641 116704 116657 116695 Remaining parts of the area are masked by 0 2 Bit device write Automatic communication parameter Write setting Type specification of the Head buffer memory Target MODBUS device Access points target MODBUS device address head number 0 Coil 000 1305 QJ71MT91 buffer memory Target slave device area bO Write bF 001312 to 001297 e Remaining parts of the area are ignored 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 MODBUS Device Assignment Parameters PLC CPU Sequence progra unnecessary Device memory The MODBUS device assignment parameters are used to assign the QJ71MT91 MODBUS devices and PLC CPU device memory By setting the MODBUS device assignment parameters direct access can be made from the master to the PLC CPU device memory Since the QJ71MT91 supports large capacities of MODBUS devices all the device memories of the PLC CPU can be assigned MODBUS TCP master device QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS device assignment parameters Device memory MODBUS device 12341 D299 400499 400500 Request message holding register 400500 read request Response
106. 2 2 lt v c o o m o 5 2 2 2 et y c 2 o c o 2 e w 2 w eo o 2 3 2 o o D 2E c o When QCPU device is assigned When buffer memory Worst is assigned case Normal case App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Appendix 3 GX Developer Connection Setup Example This section explains the setting of the GX Developer connection setup window when access is made from GX Developer to the PLC CPU via the QU71MT91 For details of GX Developer refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 1 Access route GX Developer T MODBUS TCP m MGR EERE RRR Ethernet IP address 128 0 0 1 a Head I O address 0000 IP address 128 0 0 2 A QJ71MT91 App 5 App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Connection setup window Connection Setup PC side F LM NET 101H board PLC side I F module MNET 10 H module Network No 1 CC Link board AF board NET II board TCP Bus Network N Protocol To Station No 1 MNET II module CC Link module Ethernet module nu Station No 1 Computer type 19271 E71 Routing parameter transfer method Other station Network route C24 NET 10 H Network No 1 Station No 1 HN C24 NET 10 H Accessing other station IP a
107. 2 for details of the exception code When the CPU response monitoring timer value is Oms the QJ71MT91 waits until the PLC CPU completes processing Limitless waiting 4 Preferred node specification a Relationship between preferred node specification and TCP connection opening and closing 1 The QJ71MT91 opens and closes TCP connections automatically 2 The QJ71MT91 can open up to 64 TCP connections simultaneously 3 Before opening a new TCP connection in addition to already open 64 TCP connections the QJ71MT91 automatically closes the TCP connection that has not communicated for the longest time among the non communicating ones At this time the TCP connections with the target devices specified as the preferred nodes are not closed 4 Ifthe number of TCP connections used by the QJ71MT91 exceeds 64 specify the preferred nodes for the target devices that must keep the TCP connections open 5 Up to 64 preferred nodes can be specified b Preferred node specification IP address 1 Set the IP address of the target device to be specified for the preferred node 2 Setthe value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 c Preferred node specification TCP connection 1 Specify the number of TCP connections used for communication with the specified preferred nodes 2 Setthe value that satisfies the followi
108. 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING 6 1106 19 6 1 Handing Precauthons CERE 6 1 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Setting cccceccesseeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaeeeesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaees 6 2 o 3 Part Names os deanna at dotted o DR ed D ed DR Ota dts 6 4 64 Gonnection to Etliertiet su ie ium 6 6 Bead mc eset 6 8 6 5 1 Hardware test ie eee Pepe pedido 6 8 6 5 2 Self loopback test 3 2 uda ett deci eid de de ie e dude 6 9 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting sss 6 10 6 6 1 Communication starting conditions depending on basic parameter MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Seting orerar a AEAEE T 6 15 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 1 to 7 32 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure sess tnnt 7 1 1 2 Basic Parameters ied tenente iu edat 7 6 7 2 1 Basic paraineters details rrr erbe pet re e selber v EE e eee ete tutes 7 6 1 2 2 TGBP UDP IP setlirigj ni apn or E hi pt Rp Pss gites ir Prise atr Popes uu tme i bee 7 8 7 2 3 GX Developer connection information setting 7 16 7 2 4 MODBUS us MM IRE NM LU 7 17 7 3 Automatic Communication Parameters sess nennt nnns 7 19 7 3 1 Automatic communication parameters details seen 7 19 7 4 MODBUS Device Assignment Parameters
109. 7 20 TCP end timer value 7 8 TCP resend timer value 7 8 TCP ULP timer value 7 8 TCP zero window timer value 7 8 TCP UDP IP monitoring timer 7 8 TCP UDP IP setting 7 8 Lext flle acing 8 7 Transmission 3 1 Troubleshooting esses 11 1 Troubleshooting for other symptoms 11 5 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by LEDS uua etie 11 1 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X SIgIlals einen tiet 11 3 Type specification of the target MODBUS deviCG iniecto na 7 21 Index 4 U Utility Package 8 1 GX Configurator MB functions 8 1 Installation of utility package 8 2 Uninstallation of utility package 8 2 W Watch dog timer 3 3 Weight 5 Meret pn pep 3 1 X X Y monitor test esee 8 20 Index 4 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty ter
110. 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 1 MODBUS device sizes The MODBUS devices available for the QJ71MT91 are given in the following table MODBUS Device Type Read Write MODBUS Device Number Read Write 65536 points 000001 to 065536 65536 points 100001 to 165536 Input register 65536 points 300001 to 365536 Holding register Read Write 65536 points 400001 to 465536 File number to 104 2 Extended file register 1 1042432 points 2 600000 to 609999 Whether data can be read from written to the extended file register changes depending on the pu memory type of the PLC CPU where the file register exists For details refer to the user s manual explanation program fundamentals of the used PLC CPU 2 The maximum access points and maximum file number of the extended file register depend on the file register ZR assignment size of the PLC CPU where the file register exists For details refer to the user s manual explanation program fundamentals of the used PLC CPU 3 Refer to Section 7 4 4 for the extended file register assignment 7 PARAMETER SETTIN Su MELSEC Q 7 4 2 MODBUS device assignment parameters details Default Address Parameter Name Setting Range Value 0900H 0000H Device code not assigned Device code 2304 Other than 0000 Device code m H m Head device number OOOOH to FFFFH Coil assignment 1 1 P Coil Head coil number 0000 to FFFFH P points 0000 to FFF
111. 7376 St Petersburg Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 812 11 83 238 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 812 11 83 239 mail office geva at email powel utu lt e mail as avtsev spb ru TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA CONSYS RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Promyshlennaya St 42 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 375 0 17 2275 704 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 147 20 55 email tehnikonGbelsonet net e mail intehsisemdl net e mail consys consys spb ru Getronics b v BELGIUM Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Electrotechnical RUSSIA Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com Systems Siberia Partizanskaya St 27 Office 306 RU 121355 Moscow Phone 7 095 416 4321 Fax 7 095 416 4321 e mail info eltechsystems ru TELECON CO BULGARIA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 4 A Ljapchev Blvd Teglverksveien 1 BG 1756 Sofia N 3002 Drammen Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail e mail info beijer n
112. 8 b7 Read target Write target Set Value Target MODBUS Device Type Not specified Coil Input Input device Holding register b Setting range The following table gives the combinations of read and write targets available for the target MODBUS device type setting Any other combinations are not available Type Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Issued Function Code Set value Read target Write target 01004 0200H Read discrete inputs Not specified 0400H Input device 04 Read input registers 0500H Holding register Read holding registers 0001H 15 Write multiple coils Not specified 0005H Holding register Write multiple registers 0505H Holding register 1 Holding register 23 Read Write multiple registers 1 Simultaneous execution of read and write by one instruction is limitted only for holding registers 6 Head buffer memory address Read setting Write setting a As the head buffer memory address specify the head address of the buffer memory that will store the data read from or written to the slave b The head buffer memory address must not be duplicated in the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 Set different head buffer memory addresses to each of the automatic communication parameters 7 Target MODBUS device head number Read setting Write setting a As the target MODBUS device head number specify the head number of the read or write target MODBUS device
113. 9 PROGRAMMING TCP UDP IP monitoring timer Routing information GX Developer connection information setting MODBUS TCP setting MELSEC Q 2 Parameter setting details The following table gives the setting details of the parameters set in the program example a Basic parameters Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value TCP ULP timer value 0000 0 60 30s 1 20 105 20 108 TCP end timer value 0003 3 40 20s IP reassembly timer value 0004H 4 10 5s Split reception monitoring timer value 60 30s KeepAlive 0006 6 1 Used KeepAlive interval timer value 0008H 8 20 10s 1200 600 KeepAlive resend count 0009 9 Router relay function 000 10 0 Not used FFFFFFOOH Subnet mask pattern 000Bu to 000 11 to 12 255 255 255 0 00000000 Default router IP address 0000 to 000 13 to 14 0 0 0 0 Nurriber of routers set 000 15 l 00000000H Subnet address 0010 to 0011 16 to 17 Router 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 information 1 00000000 Router address 0012u to 0013H 18 to 19 0 0 0 0 Number of TCP connectors for GX 0030 48 1 Developer connection Local slave station port No 01104 272 Target slave port No for automatic T 0111 273 502 communication function CPU response monitoring timer value 0114 276 C0010002H Preferred node address 0115 to 0116H 277 to 278 192 1 0 2 specificati
114. Alive start timer value KeepAlive interval timer value Section 7 2 KeepAlive resend count Router relay function 000Du to 000 Routing Default router IP address 13 to 14 information 000FH Number of routers set 15 Router information 1 to 8 0010 to 002FH 16 to 47 Subnet address Router IP address 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Buffer Memory Reference Setting Item Address Section 0110 Local slave station port No 272 Section 7 2 Target slave port No for automatic communication 0111 function 273 TCP UDP MODBUS 0114 IP setting TCP setting CPU response monitoring timer value en Preferred node specification 1 to 64 0115 to 01D4H IP address 277 to 468 Number of connections 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 7 2 Automatic communication parameters Setting Purpose Set the automatic communication parameters on the Automatic communication parameter screen Starting Procedure Initial setting screen Automatic communication parameter Setting Screen Automatic communication parameter Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Automatic communication parameter 1 Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Units 10ms Response monitoring timer value Units 500ms Setting item Setting value
115. BUS extended file register to the PLC CPU is fixed and cannot be changed The MODBUS extended file register is assigned to the file register ZR of the PLC CPU as shown below MODBUS PLC CPU file register ZR extended file register ZRO 600000 10000 File No 0 ZR9999 ZR10000 10000 File No 1 ZR19999 y ZR20000 10000 File No 2 ZR29999 Y 609999 ZR30000 291039999 ZR1040000 600000 2432 File No 104 2910424311222 602431 2 Out of bounds read write request The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response when the master makes a request to the PLC CPU on the QJ71MT91 mounted station to read from or write to nonexistent file register ZR register For the file register ZR refer to the user s manual explanation program fundamentals of the used PLC CPU 3 MODBUS extended file register size The MODBUS extended file register size depends on the file register ZR size set to the PLC CPU on the QJ71MT91 mounted station For details refer to the user s manual explanation program fundamentals of the used PLC CPU POINT When the QJ71MT91 is requested by the master to write data to the MODBUS extended file register but the file register is write disabled the QJ71MT91 sends a normal response and the data are not written to the MODBUS extended file register Before writing data to the MODBUS extended file register confirm that the file register is write enabled 7 PARAME
116. Configurator MB 1 Display the PING test screen Refer to Section 8 6 PING test Module information Module model name QJ71MT31 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Eenimarioaiontnecheck 2 count p ___Totalpackettransmissioncount_ O Flash ROM setting Details Current value Decimal input display Monitoring Setting range 2 60 Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 2 Setthe PING test conditions Set the Communication time check Transmission count and IP address in the Setting value field and click the Execute test button with the values selected PING test Madule information Module model 0 71 91 Start 120 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Hot requested OFF Total packet transmission count Flash ROM setting Details Current value IP Address input display Monitoring Setting range 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 254 Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 11 41 11 41 11 TR BLESH TIN elite idus MELSEC Q 3 Confirm the conditions set in 2 When the processing is completed a Completed message appears and the data set in 2 are displayed in the Current value field Redo the settings if changing the conditions PING test Module information
117. Confirm the error code stored in the area corresponding to the automatic communication parameter number identified in the automatic communication error code storage area 0C28 to 0C67 in 1 Refer to Section 11 3 1 7 for the automatic communication error code storage area Refer to Section 11 3 3 for the error code POINT 1 On the Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the operation status and error code for each automatic communication parameter can be confirmed Refer to Section 8 6 3 2 The QU71MT91 guarantees the data between the PLC devices and the network line in units of one word 16 bits FUNCTION MELSEC Q c Automatic communication operation flowchart Using the set automatic communication parameters the automatic communication function operates according to the repeat interval timer and response monitoring timer settings as shown below Repeat interval timer expires 2 QJ71MT91 sends a request message to the slave 3 Response monitoring timer starts Slave s response condition Normal response Exception response 4 QJ71MT91 receives a response 8 message from the slave 5 Response monitoring timer stops 6 Corresponding bit of Automatic communication operation status turns off 0 Normal is set Response monitoring timer expires 9 Corresponding bit of Automatic communication operation status turns
118. D 3 Refer to Section 11 4 for how to turn off the COM ERR LED 4 Refer to Section 6 6 for details of the intelligent function module switches 2 Monitoring testing from GX Configurator MB GX Configurator MB has a monitor test screen for the status display and test of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 8 6 for the monitor test screen 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN IE MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Codes 11 3 1 Error code storage areas The error code of each error is stored into any of the following buffer memory areas Error Type Storage Area Name 0C10 Basic parameter error code storage area Automatic communication parameter error code 0 11 storage area 3089 communication Automatic communication parameter setting result 0C12u Parameter parameter storage area 3090 error MODBUS device assignment parameter error code 0C13H information storage area 3091 MODBUS device 0C44 assignment MODBUS device assignment Error device type 309 3 parameter parameter setting result Error assigned 15 storage area group No 3093 Automatic communication operation status storage 0C20u to 0C23H area parameter 1 to 64 3104 to 3107 Automatic GST m Automatic communication error code storage area 0C28H to OC67H communication Master parameter 1 to 64 3112 to 3175 function function EPIS to ODFFH 9 3326 to 3583 to ODFF Dedicated instruction Error log area e a
119. Ethemet V2 0 Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status 182 1 0254 Module READY Accessible 5 Flash ROM setting Details am jonitoring Cannot execute test Make text file Step monitor Execute test Refer to Section 8 6 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 3 3 Starting Intelligent function utility Setting Purpose Start Intelligent function utility from GX Developer and display the intelligent function module parameter setting module select screen From this screen any of the screens for initial setting auto refresh setting and monitor test module selection selection of module to be monitored tested can be started Starting Procedure Tools gt Intelligent function utility Start Setting Screen Intelligent function Module utility C XQJ71MT91 E fff File Online Tools Help Intelligent function module parameter setting module select Start 1 0 No Package name 0000 MODBUS R Module Module model name QJ71MT91 Intelligent function module parameter setting module a BAL Module model name Initial setting amp uto refresh 0000 QJ7IMTS1 Available pu Initial setting Auto refresh Explanation 1 Screen starting procedures a Starting initial setting Start I O No 1 Package name Module model name Initial setting b Starting auto refresh setting Start I O No 1 Package name Mo
120. Exception message reception Byte count error Reference number error Protocol ID error The request message size specified in the argument S2 0 of the MBREQ instruction is incorrect The start of the automatic communication function was interrupted due to the processing of the basic parameter setting The automatic communication function was started or stopped without the basic parameter being set The automatic communication function was started when parameter setting was being made on GX Configurator MB at power on COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR When the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction is used the target slave device returned an exception code in reply to the request message sent by the QJ71MT91 In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the number of bytes in the received response message is less or more than necessary The value of the reference number in the response message received by the dedicated instruction is incorrect In the automatic communication function or dedicated instruction the protocol ID of the received response message is other than 0 MODBUS protocol MELSEC Q Error 6 7 Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code Erorname _ Deer COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Review the setting of the request message size After turning ON the Automatic communication para
121. FH el to 093FH 0941H Head device number 0000H to FFFFH 2369 Input assignment 1 0942H Input Head input number 0000H to FFFFH 2370 0943H oe 55 points 0000 to FFFFH 2371 0944 to 097FH Input assignment 2 Same as in input assignment Same 00000 2372 to 2431 to 16 0980H 0000H Device code not assigned Device code 2432 Other than 0000 Device code 1 Coil assignment 2 to Same as in coil Same asin cotassi nment t 00000 1 to 2367 16 0000H Device code not assigned Device code m Other than 0000H Device code 1 0981H Head device number 0000H to FFFFH 2433 Input register 0982H assignment 1 Head input register Input register 0000H to FFFFH 2434 number 0983H perc e points luere to FFFFH 2435 0984H to O9BFH Input register Same as in Same as ininputregister assignment register assignment 1 2436 to 2495 assignment 2 to 16 09COH 0000H Device code not assigned Device code 2496 Other than 0000 Device code 09C1H Head device number 0000H to FFFFH 2497 Holding register 1 09C2H Holding assignment 1 Head holding register 0000 to FFFFH 2498 register number 09C3H an ven points 0000 to FFFFH 2499 09C4H to O9FFH Holding register Same asin holding register assignment as in holding register assignment 1 2500 to 2559 assignment 2 to 16 1 When the intelligent function switch 2 MODBUS device assignment para
122. GD in a Using sequence program sequence program to make transfer For details of the intelligent function module device refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of the CPU module used 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 2 2 Dedicated instructions Used in a sequence program to read write the MODBUS device data etc at any timing PLC CPU QJ71 MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device Master function Holding register Command S 7 equest message holding register 400500 read request 12344 Response message Device memory holding register 400500 1234u 1234 Ethernet Dedicated instruction list The list of the dedicated instructions supported by the QJ71MT91 is indicated below Dedicated ue Description Reference Instruction Issues a MODBUS device read write request message to MBRW ies Section 10 1 e slave Communicates with the slave in the request message MBREQ Section 10 2 format of any PDU protocol data unit 5 FUNCTIONS 5 3 Slave Function 5 3 1 Automatic response function PLC CPU 1 Sequence i program unnecessary Execution of corresponding Device memory m _ processing The automatic response function allows the QJ71MT91 slave function to MELSEC Q This section explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 as a slave of MODBUS TCP automatic
123. I M401 MCR M lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt no D4092 1 s ppg N2 M402 When automatic communication Module Automatic parameter 2 is normal READY communication operation status __ M02 MCR N2 Acquires automatic _ UO communication operation status BMOV 63104 D4000 72 and automatic communication Module Automatic Automatic error code at automatic READY comm comm communication error operation error status status Turns ON External output Y40 SET Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when MOV 04008 09100 automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid D4000 1 Turns ON External output Y41 SET Y4 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid D4000 0 MOV 04009 09101 RST Y40 Turns OFF External output Automatic Y40 when automatic comm communication is normal error status D4092 0 Turns OFF automatic VE RST D4000 0 communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Xi Turns OFF External output RST Y4 Y41 when automatic communication is normal Automatic comm error status Turns OFF automatic RST D4000 1 communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 D4092 1 END PR RAMMIN S MELSEC Q
124. MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed signal X9 is on Restart the automatic communication function after completing basic Section 7 2 Section 7 3 Section 5 1 1 parameter re setting This section 1 3 When the slave function is not used the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence signal XA may be off Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters from GX Configurator MB or Section 7 4 Section 9 1 3 from the sequence program In the setting of intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting b1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Refer to MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed Section 6 6 This section 2 5 signal X9 turned on 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Troubleshooting for other symptoms Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Dedicated instruction is not executed Complete device D2 does not turn on 2 Dedicated instruction failed 11 5 oe ER active Lx RUN status or not While the dedicated instruction is Retry after the dedicated instruction is executed the related starting contact completed was turned on When a starting contact is turned on with the related dedicated instruction being executed the start instruction is ignored Check whether more th
125. MT91 detects whether 10BASE T or 100BASE TX and the full or half duplex communication mode is used according to the hub For connection with the hub that does not support the auto negotiation function set the half duplex communication mode on the hub side 2 Refer to Section 2 2 for the devices necessary for connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX and a system configuration example 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 5 Unit Tests This section explains the unit tests conducted to check the send receive functions and hardware of the QU71MT91 The unit tests can be run by changing the intelligent function module switch setting of the QJ71MT91 Refer to Section 6 6 6 5 1 Hardware test The RAM and ROM of the QJ71MTS91 are tested in the following steps The test result can be checked with the LEDs on the front of the QJ71MT91 LED Status Ste Operation RUN OPEN STOP the PLC CPU SEU Disconnect the network cable from the QJ71MT91 In the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer set Switch 1 to 000Du to select the hardware test mode Refer to Section 6 6 3 Reset the PLC CPU Test start After 5 seconds check the status of each ri LED Emr e When the hardware test is completed change the operation mode to Online or another mode in the intelligent function module switch setting 6 Reset the PLC CPU A possible cause of error is the RAM ROM fault of t
126. OM ERR setting error count IP address of the PING test MB in the PLC CPU In the offline mode Basic Do not turn on Basic parameter parameter setting request Y1 COM ERR setting request Y 1 in the offline Offline mode was turned on mode error In the offline mode Automatic Do not turn on Automatic communication start request COM ERR communication start request Y4 Y4 was turned on in the offline mode In the offline mode Automatic Do not turn on Automatic communication stop request COM ERR communication stop request Y6 Y6 was turned on in the offline mode Continued on next page 11 29 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Offline mode 7 7 73 0 73D1H 7302 73D3H 73D4H 73D5u 11 30 error Response message transmission failure Preferred connection count over error Response message transmission failure Send receive processing interruption In the offline mode MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 was turned on In the offline mode PING test execution request Y 1C was turned on As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the slave function of the QJ71MT91 could not send a response message As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the response message could not be returned via GX Developer connection TCP connections exceeding the number preset in the preferred node specification was at
127. ONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 2 Devices Necessary for Network Configuration This section explains the devices that configure a network Please note that the network must be installed by qualified networking specialists to take sufficient safety measures The 10BASE T or 100BASE TX can be used to connect the QJ71MT91 to a network The QJ71MT91 will distinguish between 10BASE T and 100BASE TX and between the full duplex and half duplex communication mode according to the hub type However for connection with the hub that does not have the auto negotiation function set the half duplex communication mode on the hub side Hub 1 1 Cascade connection is allowd for up to two stages when 100BASE TX is used or PE up to four stages when 10BASE T is used Twisted pair cable Dus S F P 7 7 E XX Dn 1 ll 1 i i QJ71MT91 i MODBUS TCP slave device master devicq limb uad mamie m nim Em Eras que mete uei m a d ee ELE E mmm mim Es ted el Use the devices that comply with the IEEE802 3 100BASE TX 10BASE T Standard 1 Hub and other equipment a Shielded twisted pair cable 1 For 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable STP cable Category 5 2 For 10BASE T Unshielded twisted pair cable UTP cable Category 3 4 5 A straight cable can be used We do not guarantee proper operation if a crossing cable is used for the 100BASE TX 10BASE T co
128. Q 2 When sequence program is used for parameter setting a When the basic parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 2 gt bi bO MODBUS device assignment parameter Basic parameter starting method starting method 0 Start with the default parameters 0 Start with the default parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter setting Basic parameters QJ71MT91 operation MODBUS device assignment parameters Module READY 4 Basic parameter setting request Basic parameter setting normal x1 i completed Power 2 Basic parameter H OFF Po 5 existence then ON 2 MODBUS device PLC assignment parameter yg CPU setting request reset o 9 MODBUS device S S assignment parameter yg setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence Automatic communication DE staabis Start ble function Master function EEO pints Dedicated instruction Teg goo oe ea ae O Master function NEM es vee Not executable Executable Slave function Request message not acceptable Request message acceptable GX Developer connection GX Developer not connectable GX Develope
129. Refer to Section 11 3 2 The following program is designed to send the request message to write the value OR masked with 0008 to the holding register 400003 Mask write register FC 22 of the slave IP address 192 1 0 2 When the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 are X YOO to X Y1F 1 Operation of program example MODBUSS TCP QJ71MT91 slave device Master 192 1 0 2 00 oD j Ethernet Holding register 400003 b5 b3 OR mask value b5 b3 Mask write OR b15 10 16 1 6 gt 1 10 16 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function code Function code 16H MELSEC Q 2 Frames sent and received by MBREQ instruction a Request message format Master QJ71MT91 Slave Target holding register number 00H 02H AND mask value 00H 00H Sending order OR mask value 0008 00 Function code Function code 16H b Response message format When completed normally Target holding register number 00H 02H AND mask value 00H 00H Receiving order 7 bytes OR mask value 0008 00 10 17 When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception code 96H Receiving lt 2 bytes gt Refer to Section 11 3 2 for details of the exception code 10 17 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS
130. S device is the extended file 0to a ing file number register Specify the head number of the write target MODBUS device As the device head number specify the lower 5 digits of actual device number 1 414 1 0 10 69593 sor i With the exception of the file number and device number of the extended file register Example Specify 31 when accessing the input 400032 Set the write points of the MODBUS device Use the following unit to set the access points EIE Access points 01 Coil m 0 to 1968 User 02 Input 04u Input register Refer to 3 05u Holding register Word 07H Extended file register Set the word size of the write data stored in the argument S2 and later Set 1 when performing read only When the access target MODBUS device type specification of the target MODBUS device is 01H Coil or 02x Input pay attention to the following 1to 125 User Set the access points 16 rounded up to the nearest integer When the number of write points is a fraction the excess area is ignored Refer to 3 in POINT on the next page 1 Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all or all 1 2 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 3 Whe
131. S X Y Monitor test Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter condition Automatic communication condition Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Select input Current value display Make text file Not requested Being requested Setting range Stop monitor 11 37 11 37 11 TR BLESH TIN siia isl us MELSEC Q 4 Change the Current value field of the ERR LED OFF request back to Not requested Because the COM ERR LED OFF request current value does not return to Not requested automatically after turn off of the COM ERR LED it must be manually returned to Not requested after the COM ERR LED has turned off After confirming Not lit select Not requested in the COM ERR LED OFF request setting value field and click the button When the processing is completed a Completed message appears Monitor Test Module information Module model name GJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status INIT status Not ae Baie ODBUSE device assignment parameter PI E Basic MODBUS RI device Automatic communication condition Automatic communication Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input display Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 5 Confirm the COM ERR LED OFF re
132. SEC Q 5 Check the status during PING test execution PING test execution request current value gt Being requested PING test completed current value OFF PING test Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Communication tne check ee ae PING test execution request ING Test competed Total packet transmission count S ea Falwecout f Details Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Select input Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Stop monitor 6 Check the status when the PING test is completed PING test execution request current value Being requested PING test completed current value PING test completed Result current value Result is displayed for each PING test Module information Module model name QJZ1MTS1 Module type MODBUS R Module Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Communication time check ransmission count P address PING test execution request PING test completed esult Execution result Total packet transmission count Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor 11 43 Current value Setting value LL weed 102 Details Select input Monitoring Setting range
133. SHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 2283 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 4972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel meGnetvision net il ISRAEL GEVA AUSTRIA UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 Lva Tolstogo St 7 Off 311 AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius RU 19
134. TER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 4 5 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment 1 QJ71MT91 buffer memory assignment The QJ71MT91 allows its buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS devices By making this assignment access to the MODBUS devices will not be influenced by the sequence scan This enables the QJ71MT91 to respond faster to the master 2 MODBUS device assignment range The following QJ71MT91 buffer memory addresses can be assigned to the MODBUS devices Buffer Memory Address Auto Refresh Setting 5000H to SFFFH 4096 Available QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS device assignment parameters MODBUS device PLC CPU Sequence program tunnecessary device Device memory 400499 400500 400501 Creation of response message sent to master Ethernet 1 The QJ71MT91 receives a holding register 400500 read request message from the master 2 The QJ71MT91 reads data from its own buffer memory according to the value set to the MODBUS device assignment parameter Faster processing is executed as access is not influenced by the sequence scan 3 The QJ71MT91 creates a response message and sends it to the master Request message holding register 400500 D300 read request User free area Response message holding register 400500 1234H 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX Configurator MB
135. Target MODBUS device head number MOV K100 D11 Access points MOV KO D12 Clears read data storage size to 0 MOV KO D13 Corresponding file number NR wi du F Target MODBUS device head number MV D15 Access points 2 016 Write data storage size Z MBRW UO 00 D100 Wo MO Dedicated instruction Z MBRW completed Processing program for normal completion i MBRW MBRW instruction instruction completed result MM S ee Lc XL LL LC EE We Processing program for error completion MBRW instruction result 10 9 10 9 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q The MODBUS frames used in communication with the slave in this sample program are as shown below Request message format Master QJ71MT91 Slave Function Data Function Read head holding Read points Write head holding Write points Number Write device data Write device data code register number n register number m of bytes 1 m 179 2AF7H 0064 01F3u 0020 mx2 W0000 value WOO1F value 0040H Tr Number bytes 2 gt Response message format Slave Master QJ71MT91 Function code Function code Number of bytes Read device data Read device data n 17H nx2 1 C8H 411000 value 411099 value I Number EM nx2 gt 10 10 10 10 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 3 MBREQ Instruction With this instruction a request
136. The setting of the module ID set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The setting of the execution type set in the dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The setting of the response monitoring timer in the dedicated instruction s control data is outside the setting range The setting of the response monitoring timer in the dedicated instruction s control data is less than the setting of the split reception monitoring timer value The setting of the write data storage size in the dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect MELSEC Q Occurrence Error Name Lit LED Corrective Action E 1 Correct the buffer memory setting outside the range Review the setting of the IP address Review the setting range of the MODBUS device Review the setting range of the MODBUS device Review the setting of the module ID Review the setting of the execution type Review the setting of the response monitoring timer so that it falls within the setting range Make the response monitoring timer greater than the split reception monitoring timer value Review the setting of the write data storage size 11 25 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 734FH 7351H 7352 7360H 7361 7362 7363H 11 26 Request message size setting error Automatic communication function start interruption Basic parameter not set
137. User s Manual Hardware of the used CPU module 3 1 Performance Specifications This section provides the performance specifications of the QJ71MT91 Item Specifications Reference 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX Section Data transmission rate 10Mbps 100Mbps B Cable compliant with the Cable compliant with the IEEE802 3 10BASE T IEEE802 3 100BASE TX Standard unshielded Standard shielded Section 2 2 twisted pair cable UTP twisted pair cable STP cable Category 3 4 5 cable Category 5 Connector applicable for external wiring RM5 a f o o s l r A a communica Input area size 4k words tion function Output area size 4k words iem 3 1 Number of instructions that Master can be executed Up to 8 instructions unction Dedicated concurrently 4 Function for send MBEW Instruction s tunetions Chapter 4 ter 4 MBREQ instruction 19 functions p Max 253 bytes per instruction Chapter 4 Output area size Max 253 bytes per instruction Automatic response Function for receive 12 functions Chapter 4 function 64k points 64k points Slave function MODBUS Input register 64k points Section device size Holding register 64k points 7 4 1 Extended file register Max 1018k points No of simultaneously acceptable request messages QX Developer Number of simultaneously connectable GX Section connection Max 8 GX Developers function Developers 7 2 3 lt EE EI RE 98 H 27 4 W
138. above steps please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 Referto Section 11 3 1 for the error code storage areas 2 Referto Chapter 7 for details of the parameter setting ranges etc 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IE MELSEC Q 11 4 Turning Off the COM ERR LED This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED of the QJ71MT91 when it is lit The COM ERR LED turns on when an error occurs Once the COM ERR LED has turned on it does not turn off automatically even if the status returns to normal Use the following method to turn off the COM ERR LED Method Reference Section From GX Configurator MB From sequence program Section 11 4 2 11 4 1 From GX Configurator MB This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED from GX Configurator MB 1 Display the Monitor Test screen Refer to Section 8 6 Monitor Test Module information Module model name QJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status INIT status OPEN status ERR status COM ERR status COM ERR LED OFF request Not requested XZY Monitor test iii XZY Monitor test Basic MODBUS R devi i t et pe tee a ong a Basic MODBUSIR device Automatic communication condition Automatic communication Error log rl Error log Flash ROM setting Details Cann
139. action setting error storage area 0 10 and confirm the Section 7 2 completed signal error code Section 11 3 X2 turned on Basic parameter Check if basic parameter setting has Set the basic parameters from GX setting existence been completed Configurator MB or from the sequence signal X3 does program Section 7 2 Section 9 1 1 not turn on In the setting of intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting 50 Basic parameter Section 6 6 starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Refer to the basic parameter error code Take the corresponding corrective action storage area 0 10 and confirm the error code Section 7 4 Section 11 3 parameter setting DC 114 and confirm the error code and error completed refer to the automatic communication signal X5 turned parameter setting result storage area on 0C 124 and identify the parameter number where the error occurred Section 7 3 Section 11 3 MODBUS device Confirm the error code in the Take the corresponding corrective action assignment MODBUS device assignment and retry parameter setting parameter error code storage area Section 7 4 error completed Section 11 3 signal X9 turned on Automatic Check if the automatic communication Set the automatic communication communication function is active parameters and activate it from GX Section 7 3 operation status Configurator MB or from
140. ad device number 1 1 UO MOVP 92498 Head holding register number _ i UO i i 1024 82499 Assignment points tee ec ee TI rr OPPETO neon te tara ail De EMPTIS se vehi dedo rd vu wm Cos ria i 1 Turns ON MODBUS device SET Y8 assignment parameter setting request Y8 RST Turns OFF MODBUS device Parameter assignment parameter setting setting command command X8 9 PROGRAMMING Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer input area Xo X6 U0 M BMOV 64352 Module Automatic READY communication operation status D4096 Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt x0 X6 U0 63104 0 m NC M Module Automatic READY communication operation status MOI for ids automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt U0 G3104 1 Module Automatic READY communication operation status N2 M402 A communication error X7 U0 BMOV 63104 D4000 Automatic comm error status AE Automatic READY comm operation status D4008 04000 1 sey D4009 a O RST Automatic comm error status U0 63104 0 Automatic comm error status 00 G3104 1 lt lt Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer output area gt gt y 20 U0 G14848 D5000 w Modul
141. age to be sent Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters for the MODBUS device specified in the received request message Set the MODBUS device assignment parameter so that the MODBUS device specified in the received request message is within the range Review the specified data of the MODBUS device on the master side from which the request message was sent Review the specified data of the MODBUS device on the master side from which the request message was sent Review the specified data of the write points and byte count on the master side from which the request message was sent Review the specified data of the write device data size and byte count on the master side from which the request message was sent Review the specified reference number value on the master side from which the request message was sent Continued on next page 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See I MELSEC Q Error Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code The contents of the data unit in the received request message are incorrect Review the contents of the gt The size of the received request message on the master 7393H Data unit error COM ERR request message is less than side from which the request the minimum size necessary message was sent for the corresponding function code While online change is disabled do not issue a write request A w
142. agnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information Module s Detailed Information Module Module Name BJ71MTS1 Product information 060110000000000 B 120 Address 0 Implementation Position Main Base 0510 Module Information Module access Possible 120 Clear Hold Settings Status of External Power Supply Noise Filter Setting Fuse Status Input Type Status of 1 0 Address Verify Agree Remote password setting status Error Display Error Present Error No Error sare tomai HEX Error History C DEC The display sequence of the error history is from the oldest error The latest error is displayed in the line as under Information f nr Close Display Data Module The following data are displayed Model Name Mounted module model name I O Address Head I O signal number of the target module Implementation Position Slot position where the module is mounted Product information Product information The alphabet at the end of the production information indicates the function version of the module Function version of the QJ71MT91 is available from B Example The product information that ends with B indicates that the module is of function version B 11 10 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Module access Displays Enable when Module READY is on and Watch dog timer error X1F is off Status of I O Address Verify Displays whether the modul
143. ally execute the processing requested by the function code of a request message from the master and return a response message to the master The automatic response function uses the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 5 3 2 for the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 4 1 for the function codes supported by the slave function of the QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 Slave function Receipt of equest message Cw Identification of function code 3 Cw 4 Sending of response message Ethernet MODBUSS TCP master device q Request message function code m Response message 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 3 2 MODBUS device assignment function 1 MODBUS device assignment function a MODBUS device assignment function automatically converts access to the slave QJ71MT91 MODBUS device into access to the PLC CPU device b The MODBUS device assignment parameters are used to assign the MODBUS devices and PLC CPU device memory This allows direct access from the MODBUS TCP compatible master device to the PLC CPU device memory c Since the QU71MT91 supports large capacities of MODBUS devices all the device memories of the PLC CPU can be assigned Refer to Section 3 1 for the MODBUS device sizes 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters from the utility package GX
144. ameters by GX Configurator MB set 1 to both 60 and b1 a Basic parameter starting method Bit O Set the basic parameters for the time when the power is turned ON from OFF When corresponding bit is OFF The QJ71MT91 starts up with its default basic parameters and starts communication When corresponding bit is ON The QJ71MT91 starts up with the basic parameters set using a sequence program or GX Configurator MB and starts communication However the user set basic parameters are not registered to the QJ71MT91 until the following operation is performed When a sequence program was used to set the basic parameters Turn ON Basic parameter setting request Y1 When GX Configurator MB was used to set the basic parameters After parameter setting write the setting data to the PLC and switch the power OFF then ON RUN or reset the PLC CPU RUN POINT 1 Make this setting ON when a sequence program or GX Configurator MB is used to set the basic parameters 2 If no basic parameters have been set with this setting ON the master function slave function and GX Developer connection function do not operate Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of the communication starting conditions of this Switch setting and each function 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Bit 1 Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters for the time when the power is turned OFF an
145. ameters set 0000 MODBUS R device assignment parameter error code storage area MODBUS R device assignment parameter setting result storage area Error device type Error assigned group No Module READY Accessible Flash ROM setting Make text file Stop monitor Details qe Monitoring Cannot execute test Execute test Monitor test Module information Module model QJ71MTS1 Module type MODBUS R Module Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Details Cannot execute test X Y Monitor test Start 1 0 No 0000 Automatic communication condition Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Module type MODBUS R Module Automatic communication Monitoring Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item Curent value Setting value gt lt 00 Module READY x01 Basic parameter setting normal completed Accessible Setting item Automatic communication operation status Current value Stopped Setting value OFF X02 Basic parameter setting error completed 03 parameter setting existence OFF Parameters set 04 communication parameter setting normal completed OFF Automatic communication parameter error code storage area 0000 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication star
146. an the Retry after the dedicated instructions executable dedicated instructions 8 being executed are completed Chapter 10 instructions were started Check whether the dedicated instruction Refer to Dedicated instruction failed This section failed or not 32 Check whether the module is waiting for Wait for the response monitoring timer a response from the target device with to expire Section 7 2 the dedicated instruction already being Check the target device status This section executed If an error occurs refer to Dedicated 3 2 instruction failed Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on 1 4 Confirm the error code or exception Take the corresponding corrective action Chapter 10 code stored in the control data of the and retry Section 11 3 ection 11 dedicated instruction Check whether the target device MBRW instruction supports the corresponding function Change the device type of the control Section 10 2 data so that the function code supported by the target device is issued MBREO instruction Change the send data so that the Section 10 3 function code supported by the target device is issued When the MBREQ dedicated instruction Correct the request message and retry Chapter 4 is used check the created request Section 10 3 message Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made if each parameter This section setting
147. as preferred ones when necessary Reduce the number of simultaneously connected connections Check whether the QJ71MT91 has If two or more send requests are issued issued two or more send requests long time is required as they are concurrently processed in due order Reduce the QJ71MT91 loads Check whether the target device Confirm the processing performance requires a long time to respond of the target device If the target device has any problem check and take corrective action QJ71MT91 Check the specifications using the Reduce the processing time to within the responds slowly processing time performance expression range of the performance expression Appendix 2 of the QJ71MT91 slave function Check whether the QJ71MT91 has If two or more send requests are issued issued two or more send requests long time is required as they are concurrently processed in due order Reduce the QJ71MT91 loads Check the line status Correct the line status if it has any problem in traffic When accessing the PLC CPU device in Reduce the PLC CPU loads the slave function check if access to the PLC CPU from the other modules and sequence program is too often 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section QJ71MT91 responds slowly Normal communication is replacement of QJ71MT91 or target device 11 9 Check for any TCP connection disconnected a
148. assignment parameter setting normal completed ON Normal completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested PR RAMMIN 2 MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting a When setting is completed normally MODBUS device i assignment parameter H setting normal i completed MODBUS device assignment parameter creation Parameter creation Module READY xo Of Basic parameter A OFF setting existence x lt MODBUS device assignment Y8 OFF parameter setting reques MODBUS device assignment x8 OFF parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment x9 parameter setting error completed MODBUS device assignment XA OFF parameter setting existence MODBUS device b assignment parameter error code 90013 storage area Error code and setting result clear MODBUS device 0C14 to 15 result storage area tee gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b When setting is completed with an error MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed MODBUS device as
149. assignment parameters are overlapped COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The assigned range of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory set with the MODBUS device assignment parameters exceeds the set range of the user free area The head device number assignment points in the MODBUS device assignment parameter exceeds the maximum 65535 of the CPU device The setting of the target MODBUS device type specification in the automatic communication parameter is incorrect The setting of the access points in the automatic communication parameter is incorrect The setting of the response monitoring timer in the automatic communication parameter is outside the setting range The setting of the response monitoring timer in the automatic communication parameter is less than the setting of the split reception monitoring timer value The setting ranges of the buffer memory in the automatic communication parameter overlap between multiple parameters MELSEC Q git Occurrence Error Name Lit LED Corrective Action ey 1 Review the setting of the head MODBUS device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head MODBUS device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head device number and assignment points Review the setting of the head device number and assignment points Review the setting of the target MODBUS
150. aster at power on or when changing a MODBUS device assignment parameter Error code Refer to Section 11 3 3 for the error codes When an error occurs Stores an exception code returned from a for a request from the slave in reply to a request sent by the Exception code NUES master stores Stores 0 automatic communication function or exception code returned dedicated instruction to the master Stores the function code with which the error originated Stores the local station port No at error occurrence Stores 0 for an error occurred below the TCP UDP level at power on or in parameter setting Stores an IP address of the target station at error occurrence Target IP address Stores 0 for an error occurred below the IP level at power on or parameter setting Stores the port No of the target station at error occurrence Target device port No Stores 0 for an error occurred below the TCP UDP level at power on or in parameter setting Local station port No 11 17 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 9 Communication status of each protocol 11 18 a The numbers of corresponding events of each protocol are stored Receive error Error Name of Each Protocol IP packet reception count Count of IP packet reception discarded due to sum check error Total number of sent IP packets Simultaneous transmission error detection count
151. aster station local station and remote I O station other station The following example shows communication program interlocks using the link status SB47 SB49 of the remote master station and the link status SW70 bit 0 SW74 bit 0 SW78 bit 0 of the remote I O station station No 1 B47 H _ SB47 Local station baton pass status SB49 H SB49 Local station data link status SW70 0 H eR a S SW70 Other station baton pass status SW74 0 H SW74 Other station data link status 578 0 ss SW78 Other station parameter communication status SB20 TO 2 13 4 NC NO Mt SB20 Network module status Set the following value in the timer constant KU Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Parameter communication status Sequence scan time 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or other condition Note that x 4 and x 3 represent standard values POINT For details of the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O Sequence scan time 4 or more station of MLESECNET H refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Program example for automatic communication function After execution of th
152. ation function buffer input area 256 100uH D4096 Automatic communication function buffer output area 2560 00 05000 Automatic communication operating condition ae D4092 Auto refresh setting Module information Module model name QJZ1MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Module side Module side Module side Transf PLCside Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset el Device word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 54 255 gt D4096 Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operating condition 1 to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Cancel 4 Automatic communication function For a program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt in 5 The automatic communication error code can be monitored on the Automatic communication condition screen of GX Configurator MB 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 5 Program example Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt MEN D4092 0 rT NI M401 When automatic communication Module Automatic READY communication parameter 1 is normal operation status N
153. been completed normally or not In Section 4 3 1 and later the formats for normal completion and error completion are provided 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 3 Storage location of exception code and error code On error completion of processing in the slave QJ71MT91 an exception code is sent to the master Refer to the Response message format when completed with an error given in Section 4 3 1 and later The exception code is also stored into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory Further to allow the cause to be indentified in more detail the error code is stored into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory The exception code and error code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFF n of the buffer memory 1 Refer to Section 11 3 for the confirmation method and details of the exception code and error code 2 Refer to Section 4 2 for details of the PDU protocol data unit 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 1 Read coils FC 01 Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more coils Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 2000 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head coil number Read points 019 00004 to 00014 to 07D0x 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data 1 DE Device data n 014 read bytes 2 Number of read bytes n E
154. bited among the QJ71MT91 buffer memory addresses Doing so may cause malfunction of the PLC system 2 When making any parameter setting request etc do not output turn ON the Use prohibited signal among the output signals Doing so may cause malfunction of the PLC system 3 When having replaced the QU71MT91 reset the other device of communication target If the device holds the Ethernet address of the communication target communication may not be continued since the Ethernet address is changed by the replacement of the QU71MT91 Similarly after replacing the target device personal computer etc redo the QJ71MT91 basic parameter setting or restart the QJ71MT91 1 Use GX Developer to make I O assignment and intelligent function module switch setting Use GX Configurator MB or sequence programs to set the basic parameters refer to Section 7 2 automatic communication parameters refer to Section 7 3 etc of the QU71MT91 2 To update the parameter settings added changed on GX Developer write the parameters to the PLC CPU and then reset the PLC CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 3 Part Names This section indicates the names of the QJ71MT91 parts QJ71MT91 RUN ERR 1 INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M SD RD 10BASE T 100BASE TX 0 0 QU71MT91 mam Name Description Indicator LEDs Refer to the following section
155. cation function a Fora program example for normal automatic communication refer to Processing for normal automatic communication in 5 b Fora program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of automatic communication error gt gt in 5 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Program example Basic parameter setting Parameter Module setting READY command MOVP MOVP MOVP MOVP WovP MOVP MOVP MOVP NOVP MOVP WovP K60 K20 K20 K40 K60 K1 K1200 K20 K3 KO DMOVP HOFFFFFFOO DMovP MOVP DMOVP DMOVP NOVP MOVP Nove MOVP HO KO HO K502 K502 K10 DMOVP H0C0010002 MOVP K2 SET U0 U0 Gl UO G2 U0 G3 U0 U0 G5 UO G6 UO G7 UO 68 U0 G9 UO 610 U0 611 U0 G13 U0 615 U0 616 UON G18 U0 G48 UO G272 UON G273 U0 G276 UON 9277 U0 G279 Yi MELSEC Q TCP ULP timer value TCP zero window timer value TCP resend timer value TCP end timer value IP reassembly timer value Split reception monitoring timer value KeepAlive KeepAlive start timer value KeepAlive interval timer value KeepAlive resend count Router relay function Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address Number of routers set Subnet address Router IP address Number of TCP connections for GX Develop
156. cation start Module READY xo OFF Basic parameter xa OFF setting existence Automatic communication parameter setting OFF request automatic Y4 communication start request Automatic communication OFF parameter setting normal X4 completed Automatic communication parameter setting error OFF completed X5 Automatic communication operation status X6 OFF Automatic communication parameter error code 11 0C gd and setting result storage Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area 0 12 Error code and setting result clear Executed by QU71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 5 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for automatic communication parameter setting b Turn ON Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 after Module READY X0 and Basic parameter setting existence X3 have turned ON When the automatic communication parameter setting is completed with an error the erroneous parameter is stored into the automatic communication parameter setting result storage area address 0C12H 3090 of the buffer memory and an error code is stored into the automatic communication parameter error code storage area address 0C11H 3089 Identify the stored parameter check its error code take corrective action and make a para
157. chneider Electric SA MODBUS device Device used for communication using the MODBUS protocol Sequence program Programming system devised to make a contact type sequence compatible with the PLC language as is Draw two vertical control buses and describe contacts etc between the buses to perform programming Device memory Memory provided for the PLC CPU to record the data handled in sequence program operation Product Configuration The following indicates the product configuration of the QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module Quantity QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features PLC CPU MELSEC Q This manual explains the specifications functions programming troubleshooting etc of the MELSEC Q series QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module hereafter abbreviated to the QU71MT91 The QJ71MT91 is used to connect the MELSEC Q series PLC to a MODBUS network MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA 1 Supporting master function of MODBUS TCP communication The QJ71MT91 supports the master function of MODBUS TCP communication which is an open network system for factory automation and it is compatible with various MODBUS TCP slave devices hereafter abbreviated to the slaves of other manufactures The master function supports the following two functions a Automatic communication function By setting the automatic
158. communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Turns OFF External output Y41 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 Acquires automatic communication operation status and automatic communication error code at automatic communication error Handling of Z REMFR instruction error Refreshes automatic communication function buffer output area Handling of 2 instruction error 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS The dedicated instructions make programming easy for use of the intelligent function module functions 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List 10 1 The following table indicates a list of dedicated instructions supported by the QJ71MT91 Dedicated af Description Reference Instruction Reads and writes the MODBUS device data from and to MBRW Section 10 2 the slave Communicates with the slave in the request message MBREQ q gt Section 10 3 format of PDU protocol data unit Interlock for dedicated instruction execution Execute the dedicated instruction with the I O signals in the following status X3 r Dedicated Module READY L instruction Basic parameter setting existence Until completion of the dedicated instruction execution do not change the data control data argument etc specified for the dedicated instructi
159. communication function error code storage 11 16 Automatic communication function 2 Automatic communication operation teretes 5 6 Automatic communication operation status EE 5 5 Automatic communication operation status Storage 11 15 Automatic communication start stop timing a EE 5 4 Precautions for starting stopping the automatic communication function 5 4 Start and stop of automatic communication function iaaa aeaaea aaan d 5 3 Target slave port No for automatic communication function 7 17 Automatic communication parameter error code storage 11 14 Automatic communication parameter screen ERN 8 32 Automatic communication parameter setting ERE ERE 9 4 signals for setting 9 4 Setting method 9 4 Setting 9 6 Timing charts for setting 9 5 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage 11 14 Automatic communication parameters 7 19 Automatic response function 5 10 Index 1 B D Basic
160. communication parameters MODBUS device data can be automatically read from or written to the slaves at the specified intervals using the QUJ71MT91 buffer memory 1 Data can be transferred between the QU71MT91 buffer memory and PLC CPU device memory by making the auto refresh setting with the utility package GX Configurator MB or accessing a intelligent function module device with a sequence program Ethernet B c D MODBUS TCP slave device 9 Third party remote I O etc Holding register x MODBUS TCP slave device QJ71MT91 Master function Device memory Third party sensor etc Buffer memory Auto refresh 100ms read 250ms read Holding register MODBUS TCP slave device Third party PLC 1000ms read 100ms write MODBUS device read write request messages are issued to the slave repeatedly at specified intervals Holding register X1 The MODBUS device indicates the device area of the slave where data can be read written in response to a request from the master 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU ommand Hzmerw H MELSEC Q b Communication using dedicated instruction Dedicated instructions can be used to make communication from a sequence program at any timing The QJ71MT91 sup
161. d 3646 to 3663 OE50 to 51 packet reception count 3664 to 3665 OE52 to Count of TCP packet reception OE53 discarded due to sum check 3666 to 3667 error OE to Total number of sent TCP 3668 to 3669 packets OE56 to OE6F System area use prohibited 3670 to 3695 Section 11 3 1 on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial iini PT d e reo Section 0E70 to OE71 UDP packet reception count 3696 to 3697 0E72 to Count of UDP packet reception Section 0E73 discarded due to sum check 11 3 1 3698 to 3699 error pay Total number of sent UDP T 3700 to 3701 packets 7 to 0E79 System area use prohibited 3702 to 3705 Communi OE7A to Communi cation OE83 cation status by System area use prohibited 3706 to 3715 status protocol OE84 to type 0E85 Framing error count 3716 to 3717 0E86 to s 371810 3719 Receive 88 to error CRC error count OE8F System area use prohibited 3722 to 3727 OE90 to OFDF System area use prohibited 3728 to 4063 OE89 OFEO 4064 Communication time check pes SEES to OFE3 IP address R W 4066 to 4067 i 11 5 OEBA to 3720 to 3721 OFE4 PING test 4068 Execution result apes Total packet transmission count PESE OF ES Result semen YE E f OFFF System area use prohibited 4072 to 4095 1000 to A 1FFF
162. d then ON When corresponding bit is OFF The QJ71MT91 starts up with its default MODBUS device assignment parameters When corresponding bit is ON The QJ71MT91 starts up with the MODBUS device assignment parameters set using a sequence program or GX Configurator MB However the user set MODBUS device assignment parameters are not registered to the QU71MT91 until the following operation is performed When a sequence program was used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters Turn ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 When GX Configurator MB was used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters After parameter setting write the setting data to the PLC and switch the power OFF then ON RUN or reset the PLC CPU RUN POINT 1 Make this setting ON when a sequence program or GX Configurator MB is used to set the MODBUS device assignment parameters 2 If no MODBUS device assignment parameters have been set with this setting ON the slave function does not operate Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of the communication starting conditions of this switch setting and each function c Online change enable disable setting Bit 2 Set whether to enable or disable the slave QJ71MT91 to write data to the PLC CPU while the PLC CPU is in RUN status When corresponding bit is OFF Data write is disabled while the PLC CPU is in RUN status When the slave QJ71MT91 receives a write reques
163. ddress Host Automatic transfer method 0 0 0 0 Connection channel list PLC direct coupled setting Connection test PLC type NET CC Link PLC No Multiple CPU setting System image Line Connected Q A6TEL C24 CC Link Ethernet Target PLC No Choice made a PC side I F 1 2 PC side I F Network No Station No Select Ethernet board and double click it to display the PC side I F Ethernet board setting screen Set Protocol on the PC side I F Ethernet board setting screen Protocol e Select TCP or UDP Since Network No and Station No are not used leave them as displayed on the screen Ethernet board setting 1 Cancel This is the layout setting layout for the Ethernet board Please execute the following setting Network No Network No of Ethernet unit set in parameter Station No Station No that does not overlap on the same loop Protocol App 6 TCP App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q b PLC side I F 1 Select Ethernet module and double click it to display the PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module screen 2 Set PLC and IP address on the PLC side I F detailed setting of Ethernet module screen Select QU71E71 IP address Set the IP address of the QJ71MT91 to be connected IP input format Select DEC or HEX
164. device assignment parameters MODBUS devices and PLC CPU device memories can be assigned This enables direct access from the master to the PLC CPU device memory Supporting the MODBUS devices of large capacity the QJ71MT91 allows all device memories of the PLC CPU to be assigned master device Device memory Device memory MODBUSSdevice 400499 400500 Request message holding register 400500 read request Mit 400501 Response message holding register 400500 1234u Ethernet E 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 3 Concurrent operation of master and slave functions The master and slave functions can be operated concurrently This enables flexible construction of a MODBUS TCP communication based system a Example of communication between QJ71MT91 and third party devices Third party PLC QJ71MT91 Third party remote I O Master Master slave function Slave Request Eu message Eu ES Response d ES message Master 44 1 Slave Master 4 2 Slave oH an omn Ethernet 1 In response to a request message from the master the QJ71MT91 operates as a slave and returns a response message 2 The QJ71MT91 operates as a master and issues a request message to the slave b Example of communication between QJ71MT91 and QJ71MT91 The bo
165. device data with sequence programs 11 Error codes and corresponding corrective actions Chapter 11 a Section 11 1 describes the troubleshooting b Section 11 2 describes how to check the module condition c Section 11 3 describes the error code storage location and details d Section 11 4 describes how to turn OFF the COM ERR LED e Section 11 5 describes the PING test 2 wa About the notation of the numerical values used in this manual Among the numerical values used in this manual H is placed to the right of the units place for hexadecimal notation Example 10 Decimal 10H Hexadecimal About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to explain the QJ71MT91 MODBUS interface module Generic Term Abbreviation Description GX Developer GX Developer SWnD5C GPPW n must be 4 or more Ethernet module MELSECNET H The QJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module The MELSECNET H network system MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network MODBUS serial protocol Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial interface QCPU PLC CPU Generic term for the QO0OJCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU QJ71MT91 Abbreviatio
166. device type specification Review the setting of the access points Review the setting of the response monitoring timer so that it falls within the setting range Make the response monitoring timer greater than the split reception monitoring timer value Correct the overlapping buffer memory settings Continued on next page 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Buffer memory address range error IP address setting error MODBUS device number setting range error MODBUS device points setting error Module ID setting error Execution type setting error Response monitoring timer setting error Write data storage size setting error 11 25 The setting range of the buffer memory in the automatic communication parameter is outside the range of the automatic communication function buffer input output area COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The setting of the target IP address set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is incorrect The MODBUS device range of the read write target set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is greater than the maximum value 65536 The MODBUS device range of the read write target set in the automatic communication parameter or dedicated instruction s control data is outside the setting range
167. direct access from the MODBUS TCP compatible master device to the QCPU device memory Section Confirms the status of communication with the target device where a TCP connection has been established When communication is not made for a given period of KeepAlive function Section 5 4 time between the QJ71MT91 and the open target device the QJ71MT91 checks the target device for existence and cuts off unnecessary TCP connections Ethernet function A Exchanges data with the device connected to other Ethernet via router s and or gateway s Router relay function a 9 Ys Section 5 5 This is not a function with which the QJ71MT91 operates as a router Allows connection with the device that uses the IEEE802 3 frame Section 6 6 IEEE802 3 frame 1 The dedicated function is unavailable when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 2 When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there is a restriction on the function code supported by the automatic response function Refer to Section 4 1 for details 3 When the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station there is a restriction on the assignment range of the MODBUS device assignment function Refer to Section 7 4 2 for details 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q Allows connection of up eight Developers via the GX Developer connection function QJ71MT91 Section 5 6 Checks the ope
168. dition Module information Module model name GJZ1MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value Basic parameter setting existence asic parameter error code storage area M DBUS R device assignment parameter Parameters set setting existence M DBUS R device assignment parameter error code storage area M DBUS R device assignment parameter Coil setting result storage area Error device type Error assigned group No Flash ROM setting Details ZH Monitoring Current value Cannot execute test display Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Items Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Item Address Section Basic parameter setting existence ii 0C10H 3088 Basic parameter error code storage area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence 0C13 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area 0 Section 11 3 1 14 MODBUS device assignment parameter 3092 setting result storage area 15 Error assigned group No 3093 Error device type 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 3 Automatic communication condition Monitor Test Purpose Monitor the communication status of the automatic communication function Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen Automatic communication Monitor Test Screen Automatic communication condition Module information Mo
169. dule model name Auto refresh c Monitor Test module selection screen Online Monitor test 41 Enter the start I O No in hexadecimal 2 Screen command buttons Delete Deletes the initial setting and auto refresh setting of the module selected in the intelligent function module parameter setting field Exit Exits Intelligent function module utility 8 10 8 10 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q a File items File operations are executed for the intelligent function module parameters of the project opened by GX Developer Tools Help Open file Reads the parameter file Open Ctri o Close file Closes the parameter file When any corrections have Close file been made dialog is displayed asking you whether Sedes Crits they are saved into the file or not Save file Saves the parameter file Delete file Deletes the parameter file Exit Closes the parameter setting module selection screen b Online items Intelligent function Monitor test Starts the monitor test module selection screen File Tools Help Read from PLC Reads the intelligent function module parameters from 1 Monitor test the CPU module s Write to PLC Writes the intelligent function module parameters to the CPU module 1 Saving the intelligent function module parameters into the file Since the parameters cannot be saved into the file
170. dule model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Setting value Automatic communication operation status Stopped Automatic communication parameter error code 0000 storage area Automatic communication parameter setting result 0000 storage area Automatic communication start request Not requested Being requested Automatic communication stop request Not Wm Being requested Parameters 1 Automatic communication operating condition storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Flash ROM setting Details Monitoring Current value Cannot execute test display Make text file Stop monitor Execute test Monitor Test Items Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Test Item Address Section Automatic communication operation status x 1 Section 5 2 1 0C11 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area wA Section 11 3 1 Ea 2H Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area Automatic communication start request 1 This section Automatic communication stop request 1 mis econ B 0 20 to 0C23H Automatic Automatic communication operating condition storage area a 3104 to 3107 communication Section 11 3 1 28 to 0C67u parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication error code storage area 3112 to 3175 E 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 1 To test the automatic communicatio
171. e 500ms Response monitoring timer increments D User a 3 0 60 30s 2 to 2400 2 to 2400 Set value Response monitoring timer value set value X 500ms 3 Specify the types of the read write target MODBUS devices b15 b8 b7 Read target Write target Target MODBUS device type Type specification User 0 1 Set the IP address of the target slave IP address 192 1 0 2 Target IP address Refer to 1 User b15 E b7 b15 b8 b7 bO t 0 of the target MODBUS device 10 3 10 3 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTION sinus MELSEC Q Device Item Set Data Setting Setting Range Side Correspond Specify the file number when the target MODBUS device is the extended file 0to 9 ing file number register Specify the head number of the read target MODBUS device As the device head number specify the lower 5 digits of actual device number 1 0 to 65535 With the exception of the file number and device number of the extended file register Example Specify 31 when accessing the input 100032 Set the read points of the MODBUS device Use the following unit to set the access points ET Access points 01 Coil 0 to 2000 User 02 Input 04u Input register Refer to 3 05u Holding register Word 07 Extended file register Read data 1 412 Set the word size of the read data stored in the argument D1 and later System storage size Correspond Specify the file number when the target MODBU
172. e Function code 94 Exception code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 10 Write file record FC 21 SC 06 Writes values to one or more extended file registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 122 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Sub request 1 Function code Number of Reference File number Write head Write points 158 bytes number 0000Hto FFFFH device number mx7 06H Device data 1 urs Device data 0000 270 0001 007 T P Number of bytes m X 7 Sub request m Reference File number Write head number 0000H to FFFFH device number 06H Write points Device data 1 nm 0000H to 270FH 0001H to 007AH Device data Number of bytes m X 7 The upper limit of the file number available for the QU71MT91 slave function is equal to the file register size of the mounted QCPU Refer to Section 7 4 4 a Specify the total write points of all the sub requests n1 nm so that the size of the PDU protocol data unit in the request message does not exceed 253 bytes 2 7 2 lt 253 If the above condition is not satisfied the request message is discarded
173. e set value 500ms Basic parameter 0115 to setting 0116 IP address Ou R W 277 to 278 Preferred node specification 1 Section 0117 Number of 7 2 E 0118 to 01D4 280 to 468 01D5 to O1FF System area use prohibited 469 to 511 Preferred node specification 2 Same as preferred node to 64 specification 1 z saspe Section 7 3 0207 communi 1 Target MODBUS device 0208 parameter 0209 522 020B 523 We Head buffer memory address 0000 Write setting Target MODBUS device R W head number Automatic 020C to communi O4FF cation Same as automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 1279 parameter 2 to 64 0500 to O8FF System area use prohibited 1280 to 2303 Continued on next page 0200 to 0201 Target station IP address 00000000 R W 512 to 513 0202 2 0203 Repeat interval timer value 515 Set time set value lt 10ms 0204 Response check timer value R 516 Set time set value 500ms 0205 Automatic BS 0000 517 Communi Target MODBUS device type specification H 0206 cation 518 Automatic parameter Head buffer memory address 0000 R W 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Read Initial Referenc Address Application Name Initial Value Write Setting Section 1 gt 2 09004 on Coil Head device number 0902 assignment H 1 2306 ad ol 0903 0904 to
174. e Automatic READY comm operation status K64 M401 NI 02 K72 Y40 D9100 Y41 D9101 Y40 04000 0 41 D4000 1 K100 MELSEC Q Refreshes automatic communication function buffer input area When automatic communication parameter 1 is normal When automatic communication parameter 2 is normal Acquires automatic communication operation status and automatic communication error code at automatic communication error Turns ON External output Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Turns ON External output Y41 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Turns OFF External output Y40 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 Turns OFF External output Y41 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 Refreshes automatic communication function buffer output area 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 3 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 System configuration A program will be explained as an example to realize the following
175. e REMTO REMFR instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 1 gt gt Xi000 1006 D4092 0 1 NI 01 When automatic communication Module Automatic parameter 1 is normal READY communication operation status Ni 401 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 1 MCR NI Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 2 gt gt X1000 X1006 04092 1 MC N2 M402 When automatic communication Module Automatic parameter 2 is normal READY communication operation status N2 M02 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 2 e e e O o a o o ee ee ee l MCR N2 lt lt Handling of automatic communication error gt gt X1000 X1006 X1007 M330 I 3 4 Automatic REMFR comm instruction error completion status Module Automatic READY comm operation status M330 M331 D4000 0 gt LET Y40 Turns ON External output Y40 REMFR REMFR when automatic communication instruction instruction e i completion result parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when L o D4008 D9100 automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid M330 M331 D4000 1 HS Y4 Turns ON External output Y41 REMFR REMFR when automatic communication instruction instruction parameter 2 is inval
176. e buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 6 Write single register FC 06 Writes a value to one holding register Number of accessible devices with one message 1 point 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Holding register number Write data 06x 00004 to 00004 to 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 86H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 7 Write multiple coils FC 15 Writes values ON OFF to multiple coils Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 1968 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head coil number Write points Number Device data 1 X Device data n 0000 to 00014 to 07 of bytes n 0001H to O0F6H E Number of bytes n 46 Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 Device data 1 Data storage order Device data n The
177. e cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 7 3 4 GX Developer Check if the INIT LED is on Refer to INIT LED does not turn on 1 3 When using the TCP protocol check Set the necessary number of TCP whether the set number of TCP connections for GX Developer Section 7 2 3 connections for GX Developer connection 0030 and re set the basic connection is O or not parameter Check the GX Developer connection Correct the GX Developer connection setup screen settings setup screen settings if it has a problem 4 Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 7 7 5 Error log has Refer to the error log area OCFEu to Take the corresponding corrective ection ODFFH and confirm the error code action Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 3 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IL MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section Communication the local station IP address If necessary correct the setting and with target device intelligent function module switch 3 4 reset the CPU Section 6 6 cannot be made even though each Check the intelligent function module If necessary correct the setting and parameter setting switch 2 communication condition
178. e contents of the returned response message are correct or not On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not When the automatic communication function is stopped do not make the automatic communication function stop request Y6 After stopping the automatic communication function make the automatic communication parameter setting Y4 Conduct a PING test etc to check whether the target device exists or not If an error has occurred in the target device remove the error Set a larger response monitoring timer value Execute the dedicated instruction after setting the basic parameters Execute the dedicated instruction in the online mode If an error has occurred in the PLC CPU remove the error Set a larger CPU response monitoring timer value Continued on next page 11 27 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error X Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code _ Function code error 7382H Sub code error MODBUS device specification error Byte count specification error Received data size error Reference type error 11 28 The request message of
179. e is reset RUN At this time do not write data to the buffer memory using a sequence program and do not manipulate Y signals until Basic parameter setting existence X turns on If the initial setting data are written using a sequence program the initial setting parameter values are written when the CPU module switches from STOP to RUN status Therefore perform programming so that the initial setting will be re executed in the sequence program The parameter setting by sequence program has priority over the parameter setting by initial setting when both of them are used 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB 8 5 Auto Refresh Setting Setting Purpose Make this setting to store the buffer memory data of the QJ71MOT91 into the specified device of the PLC CPU or to store the device data of the PLC CPU into the QJ71MT91 buffer memory automatically Starting Procedure Start I O No Package name Module model name Setting Screen Auto refresh setting Module information Module model name QJZ1MTS1 Start 170 No 0000 Module type X MODBUS R Module Module side Module side Module side PLC side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset gt Device word count MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area User free area input 4096 User free area o
180. e parameter set by the user matches the actually mounted module or not Remote password setting status Displays the setting status of the remote password Present Error Displays the error code of the latest error Refer to Section 11 3 for the error code Error Display Displays the 16 latest error codes stored in the error log area of the buffer memory 11 11 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q b When confirming the LED status and switch setting status on the HW Information screen of the diagnostics function Starting Procedure GX Developer Diagnostics System monitor Module s Detailed Information H W Information H W Information Module Display format Module QJ71MTS1 Product information 060110000000000 B HEX C DEC H W LED Information H w SW Information Item Value Item Value Item Value Item Value 0001 MODE 0000 0000 3 cool ERR OOFE 0000 Stop monitor Display Data The QJ71MT91 data stored in the following buffer memory areas are displayed Display Data Corresponding Buffer Memory Area Left side of H W LED Information Module status LED status 1 2 3 0 05 3077 1 C2 1 LED status structure b1i5tob5 b4 b3 b2 bi P 29 INIT LED OPEN LED ERR LED COM ERR LED 2 Refer to Section 11 1 for troubleshooting of the H W LE
181. e storage area Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data Automatic communication function buffer input area Input data 64 words 1024 bits Auto refresh GX Configurator MB 3000H 1 2288 Automatic communication function buffer output area 3A00H D5000 14848 Output data 100 words Output data 3A63H D5099 14947 3FFFA 16383 22 ac MODBUSY TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 Coil Bit register 000001 015001 Input data 1024 points 64 words 065536 ODBUS protocol Holding register Word register Output data 100 points 100 words 465536 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b MODBUS device assignment function The setting target QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 uses the MODBUS device assignment function Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the setting target QU71MT91 Assignment details PLC CPU device memory Output Y YO Y100 5 Y2FF 512 points m 1 Data register D DO D3500 5500 points D8999 TO NEN QJ71MT91 buffer memory User free area 024 P XS ed i me x P 5FFFu MODBUS devices Coil 512 points 000001 000512 065536 Input register 5500 points 300001 303500 308999 365536 Holding register 400001 1024 points 401024 465536
182. ed when the QJ71MT91 is mounted a MELSECNET H remote I O station 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 2 Frame Specifications The frame specifications of MODBUS are indicated below Ethernet ONN FCS Ethernet frame IP header TCP heade Application data MODBUS TCP ADU E MODBUS TCP application data unit MBAP header PDU MODBUS application header Protocol data unit n baud Protocol ID pd Module ID Function code Data Message length gt Used by the master for matching of the response Transaction ID 2 bytes message from the slave Indicates the protocol of the PDU protocol data Protocol ID 2 bytes unit MBAP header wr Stores 0 in the case of MODBUS TCP MODBUS application Ll header Stores the message size in byte unit Message length The message length after this field is stored See the above figure Module ID 1 byt Used to specify the slave connected to the other odule e line e g MODBUS serial protocol The master specifies the processing to be performed Function code 1 byte for the slave PDU When master sends request message to slave Protocol data unit Stores the requested processing Data 1 to 252 bytes When slave sends response message to master Stores the result of processing execution 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 PDU Formats by Functions This section explains the PDU protocol data unit format
183. en the class network address of the local station QJ71MT91 is the same as that of the target device 7 PARAMETER SETTING 3 Subnet address setting examples Local station QJ71MT91 Class B IP address 81052F014 129 5 47 1 Subnet mask FFFFFCOOu 255 255 252 0 Eth 4 thernet Setting example 1 Setting example 2 Setting example 3 Target device 1 Target device 2 Target device 3 Class B Class A Class B IP address 810440011 IP address 710440014 IP address 810529021 129 4 64 1 113 4 64 1 129 5 41 2 Setting example 1 When the network addresses of the local station QJ71MT91 and target device differ Network address Local station QU71MT91 IP address Class B Target device 1 IP address Class B 81 04H 404 01 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Set the network address of the target device 1 Subnet address set value Local station QU71MT91 IP address Class B Target device 2 IP address Class A 71n 04 40 01 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 T Set the network address of the target device 2 Subnet address set value 7 PARAMETER SETTIN au MELSEC Q Setting example 3 When the network addresses of the local station QJ71MT91 and target device are the same
184. equest automatic communication start request Section ON Parameter setting being 5 2 1 requested start being requested 9 1 2 OFF No parameter setting requested no start requested Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed ON Normal completed OFF Section 5 2 1 Automatic communication parameter 9 1 2 setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication operation status Automatic communication stop request Section X6 ON Operating ON Being requested 5 2 1 OFF Stopped OFF Not requested Automatic communication error status Section ON Error occurred 521 DEN OFF No error MODBUS device assignment parameter MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed setting request Section ON Normal completed ON Being requested 9 1 3 Section X X OFF OFF Not requested X 7 8 9 1 8 MODBUS device assignment parameter Setting error completed 9 ON Error completed Jse prohibiteg OFF x1 Turns ON when the QJ71MT91 is ready after the PLC is turned ON from OFF or after the PLC CPU is reset Use prohibited Continued on next page 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q Signal Direction QJ71MT91 PLC CPU Signal Direction PLC CPU QJ71MT91 Device v Reference Device Reference Signal name Signal name No section No section MODBUS device assignment Section YA 9 1 3 parameter setting existence ON Paramete
185. er corresponding to the error is stored in this area b The automatic communication parameter number is stored when the automatic communication parameter setting error completed X5 signal turns ON c The automatic communication parameter number is cleared when the automatic communication parameter setting normal completed X4 signal turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area a When a MODBUS device assignment parameter error occurs while the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 signal is ON the corresponding error code is stored in this area b The error code is stored when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal turns ON c The error code is cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed X8 signal turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting result storage area a When a MODBUS device assignment parameter error occurs with the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 ON the device type and assigned group No of the error device is stored in this area b The device type and assigned group No are stored when the the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal turns ON c The device type and assigned group No are cleared when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed X8 signal turns ON d The following
186. er connection Local slave station port No Target slave port No for automatic communication function CPU response monitoring timer value Preferred node specification 1 IP address Preferred node specification 1 Number of connections Turns ON Basic parameter setting request Y1 9 PROGRAMMING Xl RST Basic parameter setting normal completed SET x2 RST Basic parameter setting error completed 0 MOVP G3088 Yi setting command Yi D9001 1 1 MELSEC Q Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1 when setting is completed normally Turns ON automatic communication parameter setting command Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1 and stores error code into D100 when setting fails 9 PROGRAMMING Automatic communication parameter setting XO X3 X6 U0 FMOVP HO 9512 Parameter Module Basic Automatic setting READY parameter comm command setting operation existence status 1 WP 255 MOVP 1200 i WOVP K60 MOVP H100 i WOVP H1100 L Read setting FMOVP 15000 L WOVP KI024 Automatic communication parameter 2 DMOVP H0C0010002 Write holding registers MOVP 255 i 1 1 MOVP 1 MOVP i t MOVP H3A00 1 1 i Write setting T MVP KO 1 MOVP 100 SET RST Lt Automatic comm parame
187. er to Section 8 6 6 8 19 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 1 X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Purpose Monitor I O signals and test output signals Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen X Y Monitor test Monitor Test Screen X Y Monitor test Module information Module model name 0 71 91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value gt lt 00 Module READY Accessible lt 01 Basic parameter setting normal completed OFF lt 02 Basic parameter setting error completed OFF 03 Basic parameter setting existence Parameters set 04 Automatic communication parameter OFF setting normal completed gt O5 Automatic communication parameter OFF setting error completed gt OB6 Automatic communication operation status Stopped XU7 Automatic communication error status No error XD amp MODBUSIR device assignment parameter OFF Flash ROM setting Details Current value Cannot execute test display Monitoring Make text file Stop monitor Execute test Monitor Test Items 1 X Input signals Address Section xoo modue READY ooo X01 Basic parameter setting nomalcompleted X02 Basic parameter setting eror completed X03 Basic parameter setting existence X04 Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed X05 Automatic communication parameter setting erro
188. ers The slave function of the QJ71MT91 is inactive if any of the device number settings are dupplicated 4 Assignment points As the assignment points set the device points of the PLC CPU device memory or QJ71MT91 buffer memory to be assigned to the MODBUS device The QJ71MT91 sends an exception response to the master if the master requests access to a device outside the PLC CPU range or to outside the user free area of the QJ71MT91 buffer memory 7 PARAMETER SETTING 7 4 3 Default assignment parameters Coil 000001 to 065536 Y 8192 0 to 1FFF Coil assignment 1 M 8192 0 to 8191 Coil assignment 2 SM 2048 0 to 2047 qz Coil a signment 3 L 8192 0 to 8191 y Coil assignment 4 B 8192 0 to 1FFF l Coil assignment 5 Vict E 2048 0 to 2047 Coil a signment 6 1 P uhr SB ib NDA ie ae 2048 019 7FF yi Coil assignment 7 V 2048 0 to 2047 Cae Coil assignment 8 S 8192 0 to 1FFF Coil assignment 9 TC 2048 0 to 2047 l Coil assignment 10 TS 2048 0 to 2047 l Coil assignment 11 SC 2048 0 to 2047 C Coil assignment 12 SS 2048 0 to 2047 Yucca Coil assignment 13 CC 2048 0 to 2047 Y Coil assignment 14 cs 2048 0 to 2047 Coil assignment 15 MELSEC Q As the MODBUS device assignment parameters default assignment parameters are available as initial values To use the default assignment parameters Bit 1 of t
189. est message to be sent Function code Function code Head holding register number Read points 03H 9CH 40H Sending order 4 5 bytes Contents stored in request message storing devices and their order As described Request message b15 b8 b7 lt S2 0 gt Request message size on the left 7 5 bytes b15 b8 b7 S2 1 9Cu b15 b8 b7 S2 2 Request message b15 b8 b7 S2 3 gt 00H Ignored 02H Send data storage order Request message is sent in order of low order to high order bytes starting at the lowest device number 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 1 The request message data stored in the request message storing devices S2 1 to S2 n are sent in order of L low order to high order bytes starting at the lowest device number 2 When the request message size is an odd number the last high byte of the request message storing device is ignored The data are not sent 10 13 10 13 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Response message storing devices Setting Setting D1 0 message size Set the size of the received response message in byte units 0 to 253 Set the contents function code data of the received response message Example When the respon
190. etails of whether each function can be executed or not depending on the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 2 Program Example for Normal System Configuration 9 2 1 System configuration and program conditions 1 System configuration A program will be explained as an example to realize the following specifications for the setting target QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 Setting target QU71MT91 1 MODBUS TCP master device 192 1 0 1 l 192 1 0 3 v v Ethernet A QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 5 192 1 0 6 192 1 0 2 x1 This QJ71MT91 is assumed to be mounted in Slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q a Automatic communication function The setting target QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 and MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 communicate with each other using the automatic communication function Set automatic communication parameters to the setting target QU71MT91 Communication details Master Slave Slave QJ71MT91 PLC CPU 192 1 0 1 Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error cod
191. etion status indication device D2 1 10 15 Completion of MBREQ ON instruction execution OFF eres END END END END processing X processing processing X processing i Y OF pui yr OFF completion 4 1 scan 10 15 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Error Program example b15 MELSEC Q 1 When the dedicated instruction is completed with an error the error completion signal D2 1 turns ON and the error code is stored into the complete condition area S1 1 According to the error code check the error and take corrective action referring to the following manual Error code 4FFFH or less CPU Module User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 7300H or more Section 11 3 3 in this manual 2 If Basic parameter setting request Y1 turns ON during execution of the MBREQ instruction the dedicated instruction is completed with an error This instruction is completed normally even if the target slave device gives an exception response When the instruction is completed normally check the highest order bit of the function code in the response message to determine whether the response is normal or not For an exception response the highest order bit in the first byte of the receive data turns ON For an exception response check the exception code the second byte of the receive data in the response message and take corrective action
192. etting of the target device at the time of transmission Review the IP address of the target device at the time of transmission Check whether the target device with the specified IP address exists on the line or not Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Replace the target device with the one having the ARP function Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Continued on next page 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error s Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code Erorname _ 742Cu 11 33 ICMP error packet reception Router relay function error UDP check sum error TCP ULP time out error TCP check sum error The error packet of ICMP was received Without the routing information setting of the basic parameter data were attempted to be sent to the target device that has a different IP address class or net ID The routing information setting of the basic parameter is erroneous A check sum error was detected in the UDP protocol The TCP ULP timer timed out ACK is not returned from the target device A check sum error was detected in the TCP protocol Review the setting of the router information
193. f the router relay function 2 system using a Proxy router need not use the router relay function 8 The router relay function is not the function that operates the QJ71MT91 as a router FUNCTION MELSEC Q 5 6 GX Developer Connection Function 1 GX Developer connection function a The GX Developer connection function allows connection to GX Developer via the QU71MT91 b QU71MT91 can connect a maximum of eight GX Developers c Refer to Section 7 2 3 for the GX Developer connection setting 2 Accessible range Refer to Section 2 3 for details of the accessible range 3 GX Developer connection setup Refer to Appendix 3 for the method of GX Developer connection setup GX Developer A QU71MT91 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING This chapter explains the procedures and setting method for operating the QJ71MT91 in a system 1 For use of the QJ71MT91 read the safety precautions provided in the first pages of this manual 2 The mounting and installation environment of the QJ71MT91 are the same as those of the PLC CPU For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection of the used PLC CPU 6 1 Handling Precautions This section explains the precautions for handling the QU71MT91 1 Since the case of the QJ71MT91 is made of resin do not drop o
194. f TCP connections for GX Developer connection and preferred node specification Review the settings of various monitoring timer values and CPU response monitoring timer value Review the setting of the port No for automatic communication function Review the setting of the target slave port No for automatic communication function Do not write data to the system area 0031 to OOF 1u of the buffer memory Review the setting of the CPU response monitoring timer When using GX Configurator MB switch the power on and then turn on Basic parameter setting request Y 1 after Basic parameter setting existence X3 has turned on Review the setting of the port for dedicated instruction Perform the basic parameter setting after completion of the dedicated instruction Review the setting of the device code 11 23 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code MODBUS device upper limit value over error MODBUS device assigned range overlap error Buffer memory assigned range error Device upper limit value over error Target MODBUS devic e type specification error Access points setting error Response monitoring timer setting error Buffer memory address overlap error 11 24 The head MODBUS device number assignment points in the MODBUS device assignment parameter exceeds the maximum 65535 of the MODBUS device MODBUS device ranges set with the MODBUS device
195. ff 2 ERR LED turned 3 COM ERR LED 11 1 Check for a watch dog timer error X1F Check the intelligent function module Switch 1 operation mode setting value Check the intelligent function module Switch 2 communication condition Check the intelligent function module Switch 3 4 IP address setting value Check if the QJ71MT91 is not mounted with the A mode QCPU Check if the module is in the hardware or self loopback test mode Refer to RUN LED turned off Check if the basic parameter setting error completed signal X2 is on Check if the automatic communication parameter setting error completed signal X5 is on If the PLC CPU is faulty take corrective action according to the QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Reset the PLC CPU or power the PLC off and then on If the problem still persists after resetting it again the possible cause is a hardware fault Change the QJ71MT91 Check the setting range of each Section 6 6 Mount the QJ71MT91 with the Q mode s Section 2 1 QCPU Restart the test after checking the mounting status of the QJ71MT91 If the ERR LED turns on again the possible cause is a hardware fault Change the QJ71MT91 intelligent function module switch and correct the value Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 1 1 2 3 This section 2 4 Refer to Basic parameter setting error completed signal X2 turned on Refer
196. fgen Delete the setting of the intelligent ERR Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 1 Review the setting of the intelligent function module switch 2 Review the setting of the Switch 5 error function module switch 5 not ne function module switch 5 used is incorrect It is a QU71MT91 hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem It is aQU71MT91 PLC CPU or base unit failure Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem When using the default Parameter setting using GX parameter setting delete the Configurator MB was made to QJ71MT91 parameters set to the PLC CPU while bO b1 of the PLC CPU Parameter F the intelligent function module When starting the QJ71MT91 starting MAD COM ERR Method ersi switch 2 communication with user setting parameters set condition setting was preset to from GX Configurator MB or ROM check An error was detected by the error ROM check made at power on RAM check An error was detected by the error RAM check made at power on Start with the default sequence program turn ON bO parameters b1 of the intelligent function module switch 2 Continued on next page 11 21 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code 11 22 Parameter starting method error
197. g ytes n gt Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Device data 1 Bit device storage order Device data n The statuses of the read coils are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8 the excess bits turn to 0 When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 81H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 2 Read discrete inputs FC 02 Reads the statuses ON OFF of one or more inputs Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 2000 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head input number Read points 024 00004 to FFFFu 00014 to 0700 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data 1 TES Device data n 024 read bytes 2 Number of read bytes n i g ytes n gt Device data 1 to n b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Device data 1 Bit device storage order Device data n The statuses of the read coils are stored in order from low order to high order bits When the number of read points is not a multiple of 8
198. g requested OFF No parameter setting requested no start requested 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for automatic communication parameter setting a When setting is completed normally 1 Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed Automatic communication start Automatic Parameter creation communication parameter creation Module READY X0 Basic parameter setting existence Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic Y4 communication start request Automatic communication parameter setting normal X4 completed Automatic communication OFF parameter setting error X5 7 7 completed te od i i icati OFF ea Automatic communication X6 operation status Automatic communication 0C11 5 parameter error code H storage area Error code and setting result clear Automati mmunication utomatic imunicatio 0C124 parameter setting result storage area b When setting is completed with an error Automatic communication parameter setting error completed Automatic communication parameter creation error Parameter creation parameter correction communication xp gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program H Automatic communication 1 parameter setting normal completed Automatic communi
199. ge 1 to 125 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Head input register number Read points 044 0000 to FFFFu 00014 007Dx 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of Device data SE Device data 044 read bytes nx2 1 x no Number of read bytes nx2 gt 1 For example when n 4 the number of read bytes is 4 x 2 8 bytes When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 84H code 2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 5 Write single coil FC 05 Writes a value ON OFF to one coil Number of accessible devices with one message 1 point 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Function code Coil number ON OFF specification 05x 00004 to FFFFx 00004 OFF FF00 ON L 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally The slave returns the request message received from the master as it is When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 85H code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into th
200. gnostics _ cx 0 9 usrx2 Feichoomm eventcounter o Jg i2 1 2 Fechcommevntg x x o x 15 Writemuttiplecois o o gt o oss BEO of ose reste et oo 216 Writefilerecod a 2 Readiwritemuttipleregisters gt o x x o x 481 Readdevice identiication x d x O d o Supported X Not supported 1 The QU71MT91 slave function does not support this function However it can be issued from the master QJ71MT91 by use of the MBREQ instruction 2 The function codes 07 08 11 12 and 17 are the functions dedicated to the MODBUS serial protocol 3 For details of the function codes for the master function refer to the explanation of the corresponding function 4 The dedicated instructions are unavailable for the QJ71MT91 mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station 5 This function has a limit the slave function when the QJ71MT91 is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station An exception response will result if a device unsupported by the MELSECNET H remote I O station is assigned as a MODBUS device and an access request is made from the master station In this case an error code will be stored into the error log of the QJ71MT91 and an exception code will be returned to the master 6 This function is not support
201. h KeepAlive valid 2 No setting is required when the default value is used c KeepAlive interval timer value 1 Setthe alive recheck interval time for the case that no response from the target device can be received through the TCP connection opened with KeepAlive valid 2 No setting is required when the default value is used d KeepAlive resend count 1 Sethow many times the KeepAlive check message will be resent to the target device when no response can be received through the TCP connection opened with KeepAlive valid 2 No setting is required when the default value is used 7 PARAMETER SETTIN MELSEC Q 3 Routing information a Router relay function 1 Set whether the router relay function will be used or not The router relay function is not needed when the QJ7 1MT91 communicates with the target device on the same Ethernet the subnet address of the IP address is the same 2 The router relay function allows communication with devices on other Ethernets via routers and gateways The router relay function does not mean a function with which the QJ71MT91 acts as a router 3 One default router and a maximum of any eight routers can be set for the router relay function b Subnet mask pattern 1 Set the subnet mask 1 Setting range 0000000 to FFFFFFFCH Consult the network administrator for the setting 2 When not using the subnet mask set any of the following table values according to the class
202. hases of the external power supply Failure to do so may cause the module to breakdown or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operating Precautions CAUTION e Please read the manual carefully and confirm the safety thoroughly before performing control operations especially modifications of data programs and operation status status control of the PLC that is running Incorrect modifications of data programs and operating status may cause system malfunctions damages to the machines or accidents Disposal Precautions N CAUTION e Dispose of this product as an industrial waste REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Jan 2004 SH NA 080446ENG A First Edition Mar 2004 SH NA 080446ENG B Modifications Section 7 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 8 6 8 7 9 2 2 11 1 11 4 11 5 Japanese Manual Version SH NA 080445 B This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
203. hat satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The subnet address of the default router is the same as that of the local station QJ71MT91 Condition 3 The host address bits are not all or all 1 The default router is used for communication if the corresponding subnet address does not exist in the router information refer to e below at data transmission d Number of routers set 1 Set the number of routers within the allowable range according to Subnet address and f Router IP address below when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the default router 2 Setthe necessary number of subnet addresses and router IP addresses to the areas of e and f below e Router information Subnet address 1 Set the network address 1 or subnet address 2 of the target device when the QJ71MT91 communicates with the target device on another Ethernet via other than the default router Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 All the host address bits are 0 2 Setthe router information in order starting from the first target device 1 Setthe network address of the target device when the class network address of the local station QJ71MT91 differs from that of the target device 2 Setthe subnet address of the target device wh
204. he QJ71MT91 When an error occurs the error code is stored into the error log area address to DFF of the buffer memory in the QU71MT91 Using GX Developer confirm the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 2 and 11 3 POINT When the hardware test results in an error check the mounting status of the module and run the test again C OFF If the error occurs again its possible cause is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 5 2 Self loopback test This section explains the self loopback test conducted to check the QJ71MT91 hardware including the send receive circuits The procedure for the self loopback test is shown below This test is run for about 5 seconds The test result can be checked with the LEDs on the front of the QU71MT91 E cm PN ELE Disconnect the network cable from the QJ71MT91 In the intelligent function module switch setting of GX Developer set Switch 1 to 000 to select the self loopback test mode Refer to Section 6 6 e e O Nma e o Eror When the self loopback test is completed change the operation mode to Online or another mode in the intelligent function module switch setting 6 Reset the PLC CPU A possible cause of er
205. he communication condition setting switch 2 of the intelligent function module switches must be set to OFF Refer to Section 6 6 for details of the intelligent function module switches The following shows how the MODBUS devices are assigned by the MODBUS device assignment parameters and the default assignment parameter values set to the QJ71MT91 buffer memory Assignment of MODBUS devices by default assignment parameters 000001 008192 008193 016384 020481 022528 022529 030720 030721 038912 038913 040960 040961 043008 043009 045056 045057 053248 053249 055296 055297 057344 057345 059392 059393 061440 061441 063488 063489 065536 Input 100001 to 165536 X 8192 0 to 1FFF Input assignment 1 Not used 100001 108192 165536 Input register 300001 to 365536 Not used 300001 365536 Holding register 400001 to 465536 D 12288 9 to 12287 Holding register assignment 1 Not used D 2048 0to 2047 QJ71MT91 User free area 1096 5000 to 5FFF Not used w 8192 0 to 1FFF y Holding register assignment 4 Not used SW 2048 0to7FF 400001 412288 420481 422528 422529 424576 430721 438912 440961 443008 TN 453249 2048 0to 2047 Holding register assignment 6 455296 Not used SERES SN 457345 048 0 to 2047 Holding register
206. he parameters using a sequence program Parameter setting can be omitted under the following conditions Parameter Setting Omitting Condition Parameter Condition Setting method With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the basic parameter starting method bit 0 to Start with the default parameters Refer to Section 9 2 3 1 Basic parameters Use the default parameters 1 Do not use the automatic communication function master No need to set function Automatic communication parameters With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the MODBUS device assignment parameter Use the default ters x2 pene efe parametrs Ea starting method bit 1 to 0 Start with the default MODBUS device assignment parameters parameters Refer to 9 2 3 1 Do not use the MODBUS device assignment function slave function No need to set 1 To utilize the basic parameters with the initial values refer to Section 7 2 1 it is recommended to use the default parameters x2 When the device assignment of the CPU is not changed it is recommended to use the default parameters a Basic parameters Execute Basic parameter setting request Y1001 after writing the basic parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for basic parameter setting refer to Basic parameter setting in 6 b in this section b Automatic communication parameters Execute Automat
207. ial Setting Auto Refresh Setting QJ71MT91 3 Fixed 5 Maximum number of settings Example Counting the number of parameter settings in the auto refresh setting Auto refresh setting Module information Module modelname QJ71MT1 Stat ONo 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Module side Module side Module side PLC side Selling item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count id MODBUS is a registered trademark of 4096 4096 OR Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer This one line is counted as one output area Automatic communication operating condition 1 setting UR Note that a line with a blank column is not counted Add up all the setting items on this setting screen then add the value to ITIN ance the number of other intelligent function modules 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 2 2 Operating environment This section explains the operating environment of the personal computer where GX Configurator MB is used Peripheral devices Installation Add in destination 1 Add in to GX Developer Version 4 English version or later 2 Computer main unit Personal computer on which Windows operates Refer to the following table Used operating system and performance required for Required memory personal c
208. ial protocol is not available for use No response is given from the slave device connected ahead of the gateway device Confirm the function code supported by the slave device and review the request message to be sent Confirm the MODBUS device type and size supported by the corresponding slave device and review the specified address of the request message to be sent Review the data part of the request message Remove the error factor in the slave device If the QJ71MT91 issued this code confirm the error code stored in the error log area Refer to Section 11 3 1 8 and take corrective action Review the data part of the request message Retry after a little while If the QJ71MT91 issued this code the number of simultaneously acceptable request message 64 is exceeded Retry after a little while Check the extended fil ist Retry after a little while inii T alan Mi Eod and correct if there is any error Confirm the operation status of the gateway device and review the setting Check whether the corresponding slave device exists ahead of the gateway device 1 Not issued by the slave function of the QJ71MT91 11 19 11 19 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 3 Error code for error completion of processing in slave QJ71MT91 If the processing in the slave QJ71MT91 results in error completion an exception code is stored into the buffer memory In the QJ71MT91 an erro
209. ibes the devices necessary to configure a network c Section 2 3 describes the system configurations that use the QJ71MT91 and the accessible range 3 Performance and specifications Chapter 3 a Section 3 1 provides the performance specifications of the QJ71MT91 b Section 3 2 and 3 3 give the I O signal and buffer memory lists of the QJ71MT91 4 MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 Chapter 4 a Section 4 1 gives a list of MODBUS standard functions supported by the QJ71MT91 b Section 4 2 and 4 3 provide the frame specifications of the MODBUS standard functions supported by the QU71MT91 5 Usable functions Chapter 5 Chapter 5 describes the functions of the QJ71MT91 6 Settings and procedures necessary to operate the system Chapter 6 Chapter 6 describes the pre operation settings and procedures 7 Parameter setting of the QJ71MT91 Chapter 7 Chapter 7 describes the parameter setting procedures and parameter details 8 Parameter setting from the utility package Chapter 8 Chapter 8 describes the utility package operation method 9 Parameter setting from sequence programs Chapter 9 Chapter 9 describes the I O signals used for parameter setting the I O signal timing charts and program examples 10 Reading Writing etc of MODBUS device data with sequence programs Chapter 10 Chapter 10 describes the dedicated instructions designed to perform read write etc of MODBUS
210. ibited 3078 to 3087 0010 3088 Basic parameter error code storage area 0C11 Automatic communication parameter error 3089 code storage area 0C12 Automatic communication parameter setting 3090 Parameter result storage area Section 0C13 SITO m MODBUS device assignment parameter 11 3 1 3091 information error code storage aod 0C14 MODBUS device Err i or device type 3092 assignment System area use prohibited 0C15 parameter setting Error assigned group 3093 result storage area No 0C16 to OC1F System area use prohibited 3094 to 31 3104 to 31 storage area parameters 1 to 64 E Dcos to Communi cation System area use prohibited 176 to 3239 OCA8 to OCFD System area use prohibited 3240 to 3325 OCFE 3326 Number of errors occurred OCFF 3327 Error log write pointer 0000 3328 Detailed error code pu mee WR x Section 11 3 1 0D04 to 0D05 Target IP address 04 3332 to 3333 0D06 3334 Target device port No WR 0DO7 System area use 3335 prohibited Den to Automatic communication operating condition Section 0233 11 3 1 12103103 condition 0C 67 x Operating monitor Automatic communication error code storage 0 s Section pA status area area parameters 1 to 64 H 11 3 1 12103 0D02 meme 0D03 3331 Error log Error log 1 Local station port No 00
211. ic communication parameter setting request Y 1004 after writing the automatic communication parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for automatic communication parameter setting refer to Automatic communication parameter setting in 6 b in this section c MODBUS device assignment parameters Execute MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y1008 after writing the MODBUS device assignment parameters to the buffer memory by the REMOTO instruction For a program example for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting refer to MODBUS device assignment parameter setting in 6 b in this section 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Network parameter setting Set the network parameters on Network parameter of GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000 3 Network No 11 4 Total number of slave stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting M station gt station gerade 1 Points Points 7 Refresh parameters PLC side Dev name Points Stat End Dev name Ponts Stat Transfer SB e Transfer SW e Random cyclic LB T Random cyclic EN pawfe3 Pd Transferd Transfer Cd usse rumes ae 4 Refresh setting For the processing equivalent to
212. ice 1 2432 0981H 2433 assignment 1 0982H Head device number device number Input register Head input register number 2434 0983H 2435 Input register Same as in input register assignment 1 Mic bx assignment 2 to 16 PESE 9 2436 to 2495 O9COH 8 8 Assignment points 09C1H Holding register 2497 assignment 1 09 2 Head holding register number 2498 09C3H 2499 Holding register Same as in holding register assignment 1 OFEN assignment 2 to 16 g reg 9 2500 to 2559 1 QJ71MT91 buffer memory user free area 5000 to 5 setting When the MODBUS device is the input register or holding register the QJ71MT91 buffer memory user free area setting is available For setting enter a value as a hexadecimal constant as shown below Example 5000H Enter a value H5000 Head device number device number Assignment points 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 PROGRAMMING 9 1 Parameter Setting This chapter explains how to set parameters with sequence programs On screen parameter setting for the QJ71MT91 is available by use of the utility package GX Configurator MB reducing sequence programs Refer to Chapter 8 for details of the utility package GX Configurator MB operation method 9 1 1 Basic parameter setting 1 Basic parameter setting method Make basic parameter setting in the following procedure 1 Store the parameters into the basic parameter area addres
213. ice connection for the request COM ERR Review the IP address port No message transmission setting and other parameters of Open failure the target device Check the line status for an error Since the normal connection Retry after a little while 7309 resources were all being used COMER Decrease the number of TCP a new TCP connection could i s connections used not be opened simultaneously Alva deck Since the existence of the Check whether the operation target device could not be status of the target device is 73DAH confirmed by the KeepAlive COM ERR normal or not KeepAlive function the TCP connection Check the line status for an function was disconnected error Review port number setting of Target device The port number setting of the 7400 COM ERR the target device at the time of port No error target device is erroneous d transmission Target device 7 Review the IP address setting of The IP address setting of the 7401 IP address I ie COM ERR the target device at the time of target device is erroneous 0 error transmission Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not TCP connection was hot Check the open status of the target device 7402 Open failure established in the open COM ERR Review the IP address port No processing setting and other parameters of the target device Check the line sta
214. id completion result Acquires error code when c o 04009 D9101 automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid RST Y40 Turns OFF External output Automatic Y40 when automatic comm communication is normal error status Turns OFF automatic D4092 0 communication operation status RST D4000 0 for automatic communication parameter 1 D4000 0 RST 41 Turns OFF External output Automatic Y41 when automatic comm n ii error communication is normal status D4092 1 Turns OFF automatic RST D4000 1 communication operation status i for automatic communication parameter 2 D4000 1 KO ZP Ki HO K3104 D4000 K72 M330 Acquires automatic REMFR communication operation status instruction and automatic communication completion error code at automatic jo communication error Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q xi t Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Handling of Z REMFR REMFR REMFR Manual Remote 1 O Network MERE IR 4 instruction error instruction instruction completion result 9 38 9 38 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Program without using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking on lt lt assignment of GX Developer Refer to Section 9 2 3 1 for the intelligent function module switches 2 Parameter setting Set t
215. ing details b Automatic communication parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 b for the automatic communication parameter setting details c MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 9 2 1 2 c for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting details 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Devices used in program Application Module READY Basic parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed Y1001 Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y1008 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request External input command Parameter setting command Y40 Automatic communication parameter 1 communication error External output f HR m Ya Automatic communication parameter 2 communication error DO to D19 D48 D272 to D273 D276 to D279 D512 to D520 D524 to D529 Automatic communication parameter setting area D533 to D535 D2304 to D2307 02432 to D2435 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area D2496 to D2499 Data register MODBUS device assignment Error device type parameter setting result storage area D4008 to D4071 Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 QJ71MT91 input output Basic parameter setting area Automatic communication operation status storage D4092 to D4095 area parameter 1 to 64 For
216. ing of the QJ71MT91 is correct 2 Buffer memory addresses used for PING test The following buffer memory addresses are used for a PING test Parameter Name Communication time check Setting Specify the waiting time for completion of the PING test Set time set value x 500ms Setting Range 2 to 60 Default OFE1H 4065 Transmission count Specify the number of transmissions 1 to 10 4 2 to 4066 to 4067 IP address Specify the IP address of the PING test target device Refer to 1 00000000 4 4068 5 4069 OFE6n 4070 OFE7H 4071 11 40 Execution result PING test The execution result of the PING test is stored When completed with an error the error code is stored Refer to Section 11 3 3 0000 Normal completion 00014 to Error completion Error code execution results Total packet transmission count Success count Failure count The total packet transmission count success count and failure count for the PING test execution are stored 1 Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all or all 1 11 40 11 TR BLESH TIN siia isl us MELSEC Q 11 5 1 From GX Configurator MB This section explains how to conduct a PING test from GX
217. ion module U0 G4067 device 11 46 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING X20 XO PING test Module execution READY command PING test completed 11 47 c Program example X3 Basic parameter setting existence Data setting for PING test MOVP MOVP K2 K4 DMOVP H0C0010001 PING test execution result MOVP MOVP MOVP SET Xic I 64068 UO 64069 UO 64070 UO 64071 MELSEC Q Uo 64064 Communication time check 1s UON 64065 Transmission count 4 times Uo 64066 IP address 192 1 0 1 Y1C PING test execution request ON PING test execution request Y1C PING test execution request OFF PING test execution request 010000 Execution result D10001 Total packet transmission count D10002 Success count D10003 Failure count _ End 11 47 APPENDICES APPENDIX Appendix 1 1 External Dimensions Pme e VvV 90 3 54 App 1 MELSEC Q QJ71MT91 RUN ERR INIT COM ERR OPEN 100M S RD TOBASE T 100BASE TX B QJ71MT91 U 27 4 1 08 Unit mm in App 1 APP APPENDICE MELSEC Q Appendix 2 Processing Time This section explains the processing time of the QJ71MT91 by function The processing time of the QJ71MT91 may become longer than that calculated in this section depending on the network load factor line congestion nu
218. ition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 2 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 8 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal When the close option setting of the execution type S1 0 is TCP connection is closed after instruction completion TCP connection is closed after the dedicated instruction has been completed and the completion device D2 has turned ON If the dedicated instruction is executed again for the same target device during this TCP connection closing processing it is completed with an error When the execution interval of the dedicated instruction for the same target device is short set the close option to TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion 10 12 10 12 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Request message storing devices Settin Settin Device Item Set Data 9 etting Range Side Request message byte 7 Set the size of the request message to be sent byte units 1 to 253 Set the contents function code data of the request message to be sent Example When a request message to read the data of holding registers 440001 to 440002 is sent by Read holding registers FC 03 Frame of requ
219. lave the QJ71MT91 writes data to the automatic communication function buffer input area in descending order of the addresses in 1 word 16 bits unit 2 Transfer direction in automatic communication function buffer output area When sending a request message to the slave the QJ71MT91 creates it by reading data from the automatic communication function buffer output area in descending order of the addresses in 1 word 16 bits unit QJ71MT91 Master function MobBUsSTcP slave device Buffer memory Automatic PLC CPU side communication eee read direction Fd data write Response message data read 1000n to 1FFFu direction Automatic PLC CPU side communication QJ71MT91 write direction function buffer Side send Request message data write output area data read 3000 to direction Gunn Ethernet 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q c Data transfer between automatic communication function buffer areas and QCPU device memory Data can be transferred from the automatic communication function buffer input area to the QCPU device memory or from the QCPU device memory to the automatic communication function buffer output area in either of the following methods Transfer Method Transfer by auto refresh setting Make the auto refresh setting with Configurator MB Refer Using auto refresh setting to Section 8 5 Specify the intelligent function module device Un
220. llowing value in the timer constant KU Baton pass status TO T2 Cyclic transmission status Sequence scan time 4 or more Parameter communication status Sequence scan time 3 or more T1 T3 T4 Reason To prevent control from stopping even if the network detects an instantaneous error due to a cable problem noise or other condition Note that x 4 and x 3 represent standard values For details of the interlock program for the remote master station and remote I O station of MLESECNET H refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q b Program example for parameter setting and automatic communication function After execution of the REMTO REMFR instruction it requires several scans until read write of actual data is completed Basic parameter setting X20 X1000 idem FMOVP HO DO H1D4 Initializes basic parameter Parameter Module creation area setting READY command MOVP K60 DO TCP ULP timer value MOVP K20 D1 TCP zero window timer value MOVP K20 D2 TCP resend timer value MVP K40 D3 TCP end timer value D4 IP reassembly timer value MOVP K60 05 Split reception monitoring timer value 06 KeepAlive MOVP 1200 07 KeepAlive start timer value MovP K20 08 KeepAlive interval timer value MNP D9 KeepAlive resend count MVP D10 Router relay function DMOVP
221. m the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the use
222. mber of TCP connections used simultaneously and GX Developer connection existence Refer to the processing time calculated by the expression in this section when having the QJ71MT91 communicate with one target device using an already established TCP connection 1 Master function performance a Automatic communication function performance 1 Automatic communication function communication time Unit ms The automatic communication function communication time is the time from when the repeat interval timer expires until the repeat interval timer is started again after completion of communication with the slave Tac 7 Ts 2 Calculation items Setting Item Tac Automatic communication function communication time Target slave device processing time Automatic communication function communication time QJ71MT91 i Start End i Start Repeat interval timer Response Request Response message message message Request message Response message MODBUS TCP slave device een Automatic communication function communication time 1 i 1 1 QJ71MT91 1 QJ71MT91 Request Target slave device processing Response QJ71MT91 1 processing message time Ts message processing time i sending time sending time time U J i 1 1 1 1 1 1 Start Start Repeat 1 1 interval timer 1 1 1 li 1 i 1 i i
223. mber of bytes 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Number of bytes Read device data 1 PEE Read device data n 178 nx2 Number of bytes nx2 Function code Exception 97H code 2 x2 When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 5 1 Function List The function list of the QU71MT91 is indicated below Automatically issues device read write request Automatic communication messages from the master QJ71MT91 to the MODBUS TCP compatible slave device Section 5 2 1 7 3 Master function Section Allows reading writing of the MODBUS device at any Dedicated instruction 1 5 2 2 timing with a sequence program Chapter 10 Automatically performs the processing corresponding to Automatic response the function code in the request message received from Section function gt 2 the master and automatically sends a response 5 3 1 message Slave function Automatically converts access from the slave QJ71MT91 to the MODBUS device into access to MODBUS device EN the QCPU device Users can assign it as desired assignment function 3 i 5 3 2 7 4 This enables
224. message holding register 400500 1234 Ethernet 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Schematic image of MODBUS device assignment parameter setting MODBUSS device assignment PLC CPU device MODBUS device parameter setting example M Internal relay Coil Me m pee 000001 NET n Coil assignment 1 M1201 iJ 003500 Device code 3500 Nl Head device number M4700 od S 004000 Head coil number 0 22 Assignment points M8191 d Output Y P ud jo Head device number Le 012191 Head coil number 8192 qe X1 FFF d Device code Head device number REEL IB 5 Head coil number 64999 4 SPAIN Assignment points 065536 L8191 Special register S Holding register 500 LL 400001 2048 hs 1000 01000 Holding register assignment 1 SD2047 Device code 50 00 9 Be i 40 Head device number ata register Head holdi ist 0 2048 Head ho ing register 1999 D999 404047 Assignment points D6000 Device code 7 430000 Head device number 0 Head holding register 0 6288 number D12287 r2 DM Assignment points xm p 43628 Holding register assignment 3 Device code Head device number 6000 Head holding register number iis 29999 465536 Assignment points
225. message can be sent to the slave in any given PDU protocol data unit format Usable Devices Intelligent Set Data Internal device Index register Constant File register Direct J function module Others Zn H Bit Word ge O e 0o Du es Lm wer D2 Instruction symbol Execution condition Command Z MBREQ Z MBREQ Command Pr verea ZP MBREQ Set data Setting Side Data Type Un Head I O number of module zer to FEH upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation St Head number of device where control data are stored BIN 16 bits Request message storing head device 0 Response message storing head device Device turned ON one scan on completion of the instruction D2 1 also turns ON for error completion 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution The local device and program based file register are not available as the devices used for set data Refer to Section 4 2 for details of the PDU protocol data unit 10 11 10 11 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control data Settin Settin Device Item Set Data 9 3 Range Side b1 aa 0 1 1 Close E Bit 0 Execution type Set
226. meter setting Automatic communication start request Y4 do not turn ON the Basic parameter setting request Y1 until the Automatic communication operating condition X6 turns ON Start or stop the automatic communication function with Basic parameter setting existence X3 on When using GX Configurator MB Switch the power on and then turn on Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 after Basic parameter setting existence X3 has turned on Refer to the exception code returned from the target slave device and resolve the problem Resolve the problem that occurred in the target slave device On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not On the target slave side check whether the contents of the returned response message are correct or not Continued on next page 11 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code Data size error Module ID mismatch error Function code mismatch error Response message contents mismatch error Automatic communication function stop request error Automatic communication parameter setting request error Response monitoring timer time out error Dedicated instruction execution impossible CPU response monitoring timer time out 1
227. meter setting completion 1 1 The X signal status be confirmed using Configurator MB Refer to Section 8 6 7 PARAMETER SETTIN MELSEC Q Will the initial values of the basic parameters be changed NO Turn OFF bO the basic parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Turn ON bO the basic parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Create a sequence program for basic parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 Will the automatic communication function be used NO Create a sequence program for automatic communication parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 ill the initial values of the MODBUSS device assignment parameters be changed Turn OFF b1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Turn ON b1 MODBUSS device assignment parameter starting method of the communication condition setting Switch 2 Refer to Section 6 6 Create a sequence program for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Refer to Chapter 9 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q Write the sequence programs to the PLC CPU Reset and restart the PLC CPU Is X2 Basic parameter setting
228. meter setting request again Refer to Section 11 3 for details of the error code The QJ71MT91 does not clear the automatic communication function buffer input area address 1000H to 1FFFH 4096 to 8191 and automatic communication function buffer output area address 3000H to 3FFFH 12288 to 16383 which are used for write read setting of the buffer memory when the automatic communication function is started in the status of Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed X4 Clear them as necessary using a sequence program The automatic communication parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 00014 Set the automatic communication parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 0000H 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 1 3 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting method Make MODBUS device assignment parameter setting in the following 1 Store the parameters into the MODBUS device assignment parameter area address 0900 to O9FFH of the buffer memory 2 Turn ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 signals for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting Use the following I O signals for MODBUS device assignment parameter Module READY ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set MODBUS device
229. meter starting method Bit 1 setting is Start with the default parameters OFF the default assignment parameters are used The default parameter values are displayed on the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting screen of GX Configurator MB Refer to Section 7 4 3 for the default assignment parameters 7 PARAMETER SETTIN sau MELSEC Q 1 Device codes a Set the device codes for the PLC CPU devices and QJ71MT91 buffer memory area assigned to the MODBUS devices b The device codes have different setting ranges depending on the MODBUS devices Refer to the following table for the device code setting ranges Assignable MODBUS Device Device Device Classification Device Name Symbol Code Input register Holding register Extended file register Special relay 0091H e a o Ee M ome wn olo memareay oom olo _ ww Lune iF v w Be ow olo Die ne ww uxrgser wes osm olol e Timer contact TS ocn OO Lol Curentvaue mn oca RU E I DN Counter Internal user device contact oce OO Lo Curentvaue CN oce Special ink rey EE EU Specalinkregster swe oB o o Hem s os I SAGE
230. meters 1 0 to 0 Start with the default parameters Automatic communication Do not use the automatic communication No need to set parameters function master function With the intelligent function module switch 2 set the MODBUS device assignment Use the default parameters 2 parameter starting method bit 1 to 0 Start MODBUS device assignment with the default parameters Refer to 1 in parameters a this section Do not use the MODBUS device No need to set assignment function slave function 1 To utilize the basic parameters with the initial values refer to Section 7 2 1 it is recommended to use the default parameters 2 When the device assignment of the CPU is not changed it is recommended to use the default parameters a Basic parameters For a program example of the basic parameters refer to Basic parameter setting in 5 b Automatic communication parameters For a program example of the automatic communication parameters refer to lt lt Automatic communication parameter setting 5 c MODBUS device assignment parameters For a program example of the MODBUS device assignment parameters refer to lt lt MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 5 3 Auto refresh setting For the processing equivalent to the auto refresh setting GX Configurator MB refer to lt lt Refresh processing gt gt in 5 4 Automatic communi
231. mmunication parameter creation Parameter creation Module READY X0 Basic parameter Setting existence Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic Y4 communication start request Automatic communication Y6 OFF stop request Automatic communication parameter y setting normal completed OFF Automatic communication parameter x5 setting error completed JON v Automatic communication OFF yfAutomatic Automatic _ operation status X6 communication communication started started SESS Executed by QJ71MT 91 Executed by sequence program e Precautions for starting stopping the automatic communication function 1 Besure to turn on Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 after Module READY X0 and Basic parameter setting existence have turned on 2 When using Automatic communication stop request Y6 to stop the automatic communication function satisfy all of the following conditions Condition 1 Module READY is on Condition 2 Basic parameter setting existence X3 is on Condition 3 Automatic communication operation status X6 is on 3 An error will occur if Automatic communication stop request Y6 is executed when the automatic communication function has stopped Automatic communication operation status X6 is off 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Even if no response
232. munication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y1004 when setting is completed normally Turns ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting command M200 Turns OFF Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y1004 and stores error code and parameter setting result when setting fails Handling of ZP REMFR instruction error MELSEC Q 9 PROGRAMMING MODBUS device assignment parameter setting MELSEC Q M200 X1000 X1003 FMOVP HO 02304 HOFF Initializes MODBUS device Parameter Module Basic assignment parameter setting setting READY parameter area command setting existence For coil assighment t 57 09 079998 T rv cien c ire EE i MOVP H9D 02304 Device code i i 1 1 MOVP H100 02305 Head device number 1 MOVP 02306 Head coil number MOVP K512 02307 Assignment points Forinputregisterassignment 1 14 MOVP HOAB8 02432 Device code i MOVP K3500 D2433 Head device number 1 1 MOVP K3499 02434 Head input register number i 1 1 MOVP K5500 D2435 Assignment points For holding register assignment 1 i MOVP HOFO00 02496 Device code 5500 02497 Head device number i i MVP 02498 Head holding register number 1 1 WovP K1024 02499 Assignment points RST N200 Turns OFF MODBUS device Parameter assignment
233. n Version and Software Version sss 2 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 9 3 1 Performance 3 1 3 2 O Signals for PEG OBL ou e eee o e dm o b c es ee fa 3 2 3 241 I O signal llSt rettet rte deret rper e ege enel gH ee Pete de nea 3 2 3 3 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory sessssesseseeeeneneeneennen nnnm 3 4 33 1 Buffer memo Hst risers 3 4 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS 4 1 to 4 20 4 1 MODBUS Standard Function Support List sss 4 1 4 2 Frame Specifications e a a einn 4 3 3 PDU Formats F rctlons aro atia etta tede teme a dtes 4 4 43 1 Fiead collS EG 01 44 Le 4 6 4 3 2 Read discrete inputs FC 02 4 7 4 3 3 Read holding registers FC 03 4 8 4 3 4 Read input registers 04 4 9 4 3 5 Write Single coil EG 05 nier e Rt te e iad ed de Deed eer aiian 4 10 4 3 6 Write single register FC 06 4 11 4 3 7 Write multiple coils EG 215 een cada eel a te gt e es 4 12 4 3 8 Write multiple registers FC 16
234. n for error completion referring to Q 3 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMTO Manual Remote I O Network instruction _ o scc cp CDD M CC cQ X1001 Y1001 M100 Parameter setting command X1002 RST Y1001 Basic parameter setting error completed K3088 D3088 M60 REMFR instruction completion M60 M61 Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMFR REMFR Remote I O Network SINSITUCTION Nt A l completion result Poo E Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference MELSEC Q Local slave station port No Target slave port No for automatic communication function Transfers basic parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON Basic parameter setting command M400 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error CPU response monitoring timer value Preferred node specification 1 IP address Preferred node specification 1 Number of connections Transfers basic parameters to QJ71MT91 buffer memory Turns ON Basic parameter setting request Y1001 when ZP REMTO instruction is completed normally Handling of ZP REMTO instruction error Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1001 when setting is completed normally Turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting command M100 Turns OFF Basic parameter setting request Y1001 and stores error
235. n for the QU71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module FC SC Abbreviation for the function code Abbreviation for the sub code Master Slave The side from which a request is sent to execute a function The side where the execution request from the master is processed and its execution result is sent Master function The function that allows communication with the MODBUS TCP compatible slave device as the master of MODBUS TCP Slave function The function that allows communication with the MODBUS TCP compatible master device as the slave of MODBUS TCP Request message The message used to give a function execution request to the slave In the MODBUS protocol a function execution request is given from the master to the slave A function execution request cannot be given from the slave to the master Response message The message with which the slave returns a function execution result to the master Target device Generic term for the communication targets connected for data communication personal computer other QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP interface module MODBUS protocol compatible device etc Personal computer The IBM PC AT or compatible DOS V based personal computer Meanings and Definitions of Terms The following explains the meanings and definitions of the terms used in this manual Term Meaning Definition MODBUS protocol Communication protocol developed for PLC by S
236. n parameter 1 ee ee ee ee ee ee al MCR NI Processing for normal automatic communication For automatic communication parameter 22 X1000 X1006 M322 D4092 1 ME wc N2 M02 Module Automatic Normal READY comm processing operation command status N2 M02 Program for normal automatic communication parameter 2 e ee ee ee ee ee l NCR N2 9 48 MELSEC Q Refreshes automatic communication function buffer input area Handling of Z REMFR instruction error Refreshes automatic communication operation status storage area Turns ON Normal processing command M322 after acquiring automatic communication operation status storage area data Handling of Z REMFR instruction error Turns OFF Normal processing command M322 when Module READY X1000 or Automatic communication operation status X1006 is OFF When automatic communication parameter 1 is normal When automatic communication parameter 2 is normal 9 PROGRAMMING Handling of automatic communication error Y40 D9100 Y41 D9101 Y40 D4000 0 41 D4000 1 M330 REMFR instruction completion X1000 X1006 X1007 M330 Module Automatic Automatic REMFR READY comm comm instruction operation error completion status status M330 M331 D4000 0 SET REMFR REMFR instruction instruction completion resul
237. n specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal Read setting Write setting 10 4 10 4 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 The combinations of the read and write targets that can be set in the target MODBUS device type setting and the setting ranges of the access points are as indicated in the following table Specification of the Target MODBUS Device Access Points Access Points Setting Range Range Function Code Read target Write target Read points Write point o col O 01 Readcols 100200 Read discrete inputs 1 to 2000 Input register No specification Read input registers 1to 125 sx 03 Read holding registers 110125 20 Readflerecod ttoizt Co 15 write multiple cos 1toi98 No specification Holdigregister 16 Write multiple registers _ iwis Extended file register 21 Write filerecord hoiz 1 No combination setting other than the above is allowed for the type specification of the target MODBUS device S1 8 2 Reading and writing can be performed simultaneously with one instruction only when both targets are the holding registers 3 Read file record FC 20 and Write file record FC 21 allows access to multiple areas in one communication however only one area is accessible in one communication when using this dedicated instruction
238. n start request or automatic communication stop request select the corresponding item in the Setting value column and click the Execute test button When conducting a test on the automatic communication start request or automatic communication stop request with Being requested set in the Setting value column make sure that Not requested is displayed in the Current value column When the current value is Being requested the test for Being requested setting cannot be performed In such a case change it to Not requested and start the test 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 4 Error log Monitor Purpose Display the errors that occurred in the QJ71MT91 The latest error is displayed as Error log 1 and up to 32 past errors are displayed in order of occurrence Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen gt Error log Monitor Screen Error log Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No Module type MODBUS R Module Seta vai The error logis displayed in order of the latest eror Number ofenorsoccured o 0000 Exepincode 1 1 t __Functioncode o 0 __ Target device pot No Jo o o 0 0000 ___Excentioncode 1 9 Fuc ncde 1 1 0 9 Flash ROM setting Details Cannot execute test Monitoring Make text file
239. name gt Initial setting Setting Screen Initial setting Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBLIS R Module Setting item Setting value MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Basic parameter Basic parameter Automatic communication parameter Automatic communication parameter M DBUS R device assignment parameter MODBUS R device assignment Details Make text file End setup Cancel Explanation 1 Parameter setting Select a button under the Setting value and set the parameters on the corresponding screen Basic parameter setting refer to Section 8 7 1 Automatic communication parameter setting refer to Section 8 7 2 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting refer to Section 8 7 3 2 Command buttons Make text file Creates a file of screen data in a text file format End setup Accepts the set values and ends the setting Cancel Discards the set values and ends the setting 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 1 When parameters are set on the initial setting screen Basic parameter setting existence X3 turns on after the PLC CPU is in RUN status 2 The initial setting is stored as the intelligent function module parameters After data have been written to the CPU module the initial setting is updated when the PLC is powered off and then on RUN or the CPU modul
240. nation are all 0 or all 1 COM ERR The connection not open was used to send data The connection used to send data was already closed The TCP connection was disconnected forcibly from the target device This error may be ignored when no problems arise from this error COM ERR The OS of the QJ71MT91 detected some error COM ERR COM ERR Correct the target IP address set to the dedicated instruction s control data or automatic communication parameter Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Counter the problem in the following procedure 1 Check whether or not the QJ71MT91 power supply module and CPU module are mounted correctly on the base unit 2 Check whether or not the operating environment of the QJ71MT91 is within the range of general specifications of the CPU module 3 Check whether the power capacity is sufficient or not 4 Check the QJ71MT91 CPU module and base unit to see if the hardware is normal according to the manual of each module If the module is faulty please contact your local Mitsubishi service center or representative for repair 5 If the problem cannot be resolved in the
241. nection a TCP connections for GX Developer connection represents connections for connecting GX Developer using the TCP protocol Set the desired number to the Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection b TCP connections for GX Developer connection are handled as preferred connections c When GX Developer is connected using the UDP protocol no setting is required for the Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 7 2 4 MODBUS TCP setting 1 Local slave station port No Set the port No on the QJ71MT91 side for receiving a request message from the master using the slave function of the QJ71MT91 POINT 1 The specifications of the MODBUS TCP protocol define that 502 should be used as the port No for the slave In this setting the default value is 502 and normally need not be changed 2 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 2 Target slave port No for automatic communication function Set the target slave port No for issuing a request message using the automatic communication function master function of the QJ71MT91 POINT 1 The specifications of the MODBUS TCP protocol define that 502 should be used as the port No for the slave In this setting the default value is 502 and normally need not be changed 2 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program
242. ng basic parameters are available for the KeepAlive function KeepAlive start timer value KeepAlive interval timer value KeepAlive resend count Change the default values set to the basic parameters as necessary Refer to Section 7 2 for details of the basic parameters Operation of KeepAlive function a The QJ71MT91 starts the KeepAlive start timer when it receives the last message from the target device whose TCP connection is open b The QU71MT91 sends the KeepAlive message for alive check to the target device and starts the KeepAlive interval timer when the KeepAlive start timer expires c The QJ71MT91 resends the KeepAlive message for alive check to the target device when ACK is not returned from the target device and the KeepAlive interval timer expires The QJ71MT91 sends the KeepAlive message for alive check by the number of times set as the KeepAlive resend count until it receives ACK from the target device d An alive check error occurs if the QJ71MT91 cannot receive ACK from the target device after it has sent the KeepAlive message for alive check by the number of times set as the KeepAlive resend count At that time the QJ71MT91 forcibly closes the TCP connection and issues an error code 5 FUNCTIONS Operation of KeepAlive function QJ71MT91 KeepAlive resend count 3 times Timeout Timeout Timeout _ Alive check error Keepa ive Start Stop Sta
243. ng condition Preferred node specification 1 TCP connection preferred node specification 64 TCP connection number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 64 It is not necessary to use the preferred node specification when the total number of TCP connections used by the QJ71MT91 is not more than 64 7 PARAMETER SETTIN suos MELSEC Q 7 3 Automatic Communication Parameters 7 3 1 Automatic communication parameters details Default Address Parameter Name Setting Range Value 0200 to Refer to 1 in this section 0201H Target station IP address 00000000 et communication 00000000H 512 to 513 parameter not set 0 to 255 Target device 1 MODBUS Serial Module ID 0 Broadcast 1 to 247 MODBUS Serial device station No 2 MODBUS TCP 255 Repeat interval timer value j 0 to 65535 Set time 7 set value x 10ms 0 2 to 2400 When the set value is 0 the QJ71MT91 operates at 60 30s Response monitoring timer value Set time set value 500ms Not specified Automatic Read coils communication Read discrete inputs parameter 1 Type specification of the target Read input registers MODBUS device Read holding registers Write coils Write holding registers Read Write holding registers Head buffer memory address 1000H to 1FFFH 0000H Target MODBUS device head 0 to 65535 1 number Access points 2 0 to 2000 m Head buffer memory address 3000H to 3FFFH 0000H Targe
244. nnection between the QJ71MT91 and the target device b RJ45 jack c Hub for 100Mbps 10Mbps network POINT In high speed communication 100Mbps by the 100BASE TX connection a communication error may occur under the influence of high frequency noise from devices other than the PLC in the installation environment Take the following action on the QU71MT91 side to prevent the influence of high frequency noise in the construction of a network system 1 Wiring connection Do not install a twisted pain cable together with the main circuit and power cables etc Place the twisted pair cable in a duct 2 Communication system Increase the number of communication retries if necessary Change the hub used for connection into a 10Mbps hub and make communication at a transmission speed of 10Mbps 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 3 System Configuration and Access Range This section provides the system configurations using the QU71MT91 1 The target devices available for communication with the QJ71MT91 are the following two kinds of devices Master slave device supporting the MODBUS TCP protocol Personal computer running GX Developer 1 Ethernet devices can also be installed on the Ethernet line where the MODBUS system exists However communication with the QU71MT91 is not available 1 Basic system configuration MODBUS TCP communication
245. nstalling and Uninstalling GX Configurator MB Refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual Startup for details about installing and uninstalling GX Configurator MB 8 2 1 Precautions for use This section explains the precautions for use of GX Configurator MB 1 2 4 5 Safety first As GX Configurator MB is add on software for use with GX Developer read and understand the basic operating instructions and safety precautions found in the GX Developer Operating Manual Installation GX Configurator MB is added on and started by GX Developer Version 4 or later Accordingly install GX Configurator MB into personal computers that already have GX Developer Version 4 or later installed Display screen errors during use of GX Configurator MB Due to insufficient system resources a normal screen may not be displayed when GX Configurator MB is used In this case close GX Configurator MB GX Developer programs etc and other applications and then restart GX Developer and GX Configurator MB in this order Starting GX Configurator MB a In GX Developer select QCPU mode for the PLC series and set the project If anything other than QCPU mode is selected for the PLC series and project settings are not made GX Configurator MB will not start b Multiple utility softwares can be used concurrently Note that only one of them can perform the operation of Open file Save file for intelligent function module
246. o INEA CR d o o CROATIA MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND Drvinje 63 ul Sliczna 36 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 3667 140 e mail PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 email krakow mopl pl AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 Fax 45 0 43 95 9591 mail IpiaGlpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 7280 Fax 372 0 6 51 7288 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 email infoGbeijer fi UTECO A B E F 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr GREECE Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utuGutu lv LATVIA Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Str Biharia No 67 77 RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 Fax
247. o so may cause an electric shock product damage or malfunction e Use crimp contact pressure displacement or soldering to wire the connectors for external connections properly using the manufacturer specified tools If the connection is incomplete it may cause the module to short circuit catch fire or malfunction N CAUTION e Securely connect the connector to the module e Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e Wire the module correctly after confirming the type of the connected interface If the cable is connected to a different interface or wired incorrectly it may cause a fire or breakdown e When disconnecting the communication and power cables from the module do not pull the cables by hand When disconnecting a cable with a connector hold the connector to the module by hand and pull it out to remove the cable If the cable is pulled while being connected to the module it may damage the module and or cable or make cable contact improper causing a malfunction Be careful not to let any foreign matter such as wire chips get inside the module They may cause fire as well as breakdo
248. of GX Developer 1 Network type MNET H remote master 2 Starting I O No 0000 3 Network No 11 4 Total number of slave stations 1 5 Mode Online 6 Network range assignment XY setting ETNEEZZ M station gt station M station seen crew unge xe Se uem ctm e Sw Eu Rae p Sw E Cue D End BW 7 Refresh parameters E ot se sia oF SS je Sl iw 0 Mensen iw HE e Transfere LX 32 10001 101F a Transfer SB Transfer Sw Random cyclic andom cyclic TREE LY 32 10F Transfers v o penfe menfe 1 5 Automatic communication function a Fora program example for normal automatic communication refer to lt lt Processing for normal automatic communication in 6 b b Fora program example for error code acquisition at an automatic communication error refer to Handling of automatic communication error in 6 b The automatic communication error code can be monitored on the Automatic communication condition screen of GX Configurator MB 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 6 Program example a Interlock program example for remote master station and remote I O station Provide interlocks depending on the link status of the remote m
249. omatic communication function Set the automatic communication parameters to use this function Refer to Section 7 3 for details of the automatic communication parameters Start and stop of automatic communication function a When the automatic communication parameters are set from the utility package GX Configurator MB the automatic communication function can be started by powering the PLC off and then on RUN or by resetting the CPU module RUN The automatic communication function does not start when the CPU module is switched from STOP to RUN Setting the automatic communication parameters from GX Configurator MB eliminates the need of a sequence program for start b Onthe Automatic communication status screen of GX Configurator MB the start stop test of the automatic communication function can be performed Refer to Section 8 6 3 FUNCTION MELSEC Q c start or stop the automatic communication function from a sequence program turn on off Automatic communication parameter setting request Automatic communication start request Y4 and Automatic communication stop request Y6 d Automatic communication start stop timing chart i Automatic communication parameter Automatic Automatic communication parameter i setting normal completed Automatic icommunication setting normal completed Automatic i communication start istop communication start 1 1 1 1 1 1 Automatic co
250. omputer Hard disk For installation 65 MB or more free space 10 MB or more Display 800 600 dot or more resolution Microsoft Windows 95 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System English version Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System English version Operating system Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Operating System Version 4 0 English version Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version 1 Install GX Configurator MB in GX Developer Version 4 or later in the same language GX Developer English version and GX Configurator MB Japanese version cannot be used in combination and GX Developer Japanese version and GX Configurator MB English version cannot be used in combination 2 GX Configurator MB is not allowed to use with GX Developer Version 3 or earlier versions 3 Setting fonts Size of Windows to Large Fonts may cause the text to extend off screen Therefore choose Small Fonts Used operating system and performance required for personal computer Performance Required for Personal Computer Operating System Required memory Windows 95 Service Pack 1 or later Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more Windows 98 Pentium 133MHz or more 32MB or more compatibility mode and Fast
251. on 10 1 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q 10 2 MBRW Instruction Word With this instruction the MODBUS device data are read from and written to the slave Usable Devices MELSECNET H Intelligent Set Data Internal device Index register Constant File register Direct J _ function module Others Bi Word ae 1 UE MESSEN a Instruction symbol Execution condition Command mci I Command ZP MBRW i S 4 Set data Setdata data Setting Setting Side Data Type ce number of device where control data are stored User teeter J Read data storing device Se Write data storing device zs Un Head I O number of module T 00H to FEH Upper 2 digits of the I O number in 3 digit notation BIN 16 bits Device turned ON one scan on completion of the instruction stem D2 1 also turns ON for error completion Y 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution 10 2 System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 Specify a dummy device if OOH Not specified is selected in the Type specification of the target MODBUS device S1 8 The local device and program based file register are not available as the devices used for set data 10 2 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Control
252. on 7300H or more Section 11 3 3 in this manual Exception code gt Section 11 3 2 in this manual 2 If Basic parameter setting request Y1 turns ON during execution of the MBRW instruction the dedicated instruction is completed with an error 10 7 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q Program example The following program is designed to read and write the device data in the holding register of the slave IP address 192 1 0 2 When the I O signals of the QJ71MT91 are X YOO to X Y1F MODBUSS TCP QJ71MT91 slave device Master 192 1 0 2 i F kb aS nei z n Ethernet QJ71MT91 MODBUSS TCP Master slave device Device memory MODBUSS device 400500 32 points 400531 411000 100 411099 10 8 10 8 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q X20 XO x L MOV H1 DO Execution type Dedicated Module Basic instruction READY parameter start setting command existence MOV HO pi Clears the complete condition to 0 uo 02 Clears the MODBUS exception code to 0 DMOV H0CO010002 D3 Target IP address MV K255 D5 Module ID Station No MV Ho 06 Target slave port No mov HO 07 Response monitoring timer value specification of the target MODBUS device MV Ko D9 Corresponding file number BA
253. on 1 Error is set 7 Repeat interval timer starts QJ71MT91 Master function 1 7 1 7 1 7 Timeout Start Timeout Start Timeout Start Repeat interval mE 7 A timer 16 19 3 5 i 3 8 23 5 Start Stop Start Timeout Start Stop Response h monitoring timer i i i i 1 Y i Request Response Request Request Response message message message message message 2 44 1 Request slave device message Response TER 5 6 5 6 2 4 Request Response RecoVerY me ssage message 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 Automatic communication function buffer areas a Automatic communication function buffer areas The automatic communication function uses the following buffer memory areas Application Buffer Memory Address Automatic communication function Stores data read from the 1000 to 1FFFH buffer input area slave Automatic communication function Stores data to be written 30004 to 3FFFu buffer output area to the slave Transfer direction of automatic communication function buffer input output area The following shows the transfer directions of data stored into the buffer memory by the automatic communication function 1 Transfer direction in automatic communication function buffer input area When receiving a response message from the s
254. on 1 Number of connections 0117 279 9 PROGRAMMING Automatic communication parameter 1 Automatic communication parameter 2 MELSEC Q b Automatic communication parameters Setting Item Buffer Memory Address Set Value C0010002H Target station IP address 0200 to 0201H 512 to 513 192 1 0 2 Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device address Read setting device head number Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS device head number Write setting c MODBUS device assignment parameters Setting Item Coil assignment 1 Holding register assignment 1 Device code Head device number Head coil number Assignment points Device code Head device number Head input register number Assignment points Device code Head device number Head holding register number Assignment points 0202 514 1200 120s 0100H Read coils 1100H 15000 0203 515 0204 516 0 0205 517 0206 518 1024 100 02074 519 0208 520 020 to 0200 524 to 525 020E 020F 0210H i C0010002 192 1 0 2 526 527 10 100ms 528 60 30s 0211 529 0005u Write holding registers 3A00H 0216 534
255. on in the error log area of the buffer memory is not cleared erased by turning ON the COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y1B 2 Program conditions In this program COM ERR LED OFF request Y1B is turned on to turn off the COM ERR LED Device Name Application Module READY QJ71MT91 input output XIB COM ERR LED status Output ERR LED OFF request External input command ERR LED OFF command 3 Program example Input X20 X0 X1B SET Y1B COM ERR LED COM ERR Module COM ERR COMERR OFF request LEDOFF READY LED status LED OFF command request COM ERR LED COM ERR COM ERR OFF completed LED status LED OFF request END 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN Seiden AIL MELSEC Q 11 5 Conducting PING Test to Check QJ71MT91 Connection Address OFEOn 4064 This section explains how to conduct a PING test in the QJ71MT91 Method Reference Section From GX Configurator MB Section 11 5 1 From sequence program 1 PING test Section 11 5 2 a A PING test checks whether the other QJ71MT91 or MODBUS CP device exists or not on Ethernet same subnet address where the QJ71MT91 is connected or if a target device personal computer having the specified IP address exists or not b Perform a PING test to check the following 1 Whether the QJ71MT91 is correctly connected to the other device on the line 2 Whether the basic parameter sett
256. once and then on RUN again or reset the CPU module RUN 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 7 3 MODBUS device assignment parameters Setting Purpose Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters on the MODBUS device assignment parameter screen Starting Procedure Initial setting screen MODBUS device assignment Setting Screen MODBUS R device assignment parameter Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting value Coil assignment 1 Device Details Device input Make text file End setup Cancel 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Setting Items For the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting set the data format or setting range value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values Buffer Memory Reference Device TOM Head device number 2305 0902 2306 0903 2307 Coil assignment 2 to Same as in coll assignment 1 0904 to 09 16 9 2308 to 2367 VAR Device TM Head device number 2369 0942 2370 Assignment points 0943 2371 Coil assignment 1 Head coil number coil number Assignment points Input assignment 1 Head Head input number number Input assignment 2 to Same as in input assignment 1 0944u to 097FH 16 P 9 2372 to 2431 Section 7 4 Dev
257. oring timer value timer value value value timer value timer value 2 Response monitoring Split reception TCP ULP TCP end TCP IP timer value for dedicated gt monitoring gt timer gt timer gt resend gt reassembly instruction timer value value value timer value timer value 1 Automatic communication response monitoring timer value is a response monitoring timer value for the automatic communication function Refer to Section 7 3 for details 2 Refer to Section 7 4 for details When making communication between two QJ71MT91s perform the same settings to both modules 2 Specify the target device side timer values that will satisfy the following conditions If the timer values are not as indicated below communication errors such as send time out may occur frequently E Target device side TCP QJ71MT91 side TCP resend timer value resend timer value 2 Monitoring timer value on target CPU response QJ71MTS1 side M device side application software gt monitoring TCP ULP timer xn timer value value 1 n indicates a TCP split transmission count which is obtained from the following calculation Message size sent by QU71MT91 n ee a er eee rounded up to nearest integer Maximum Segment size 2 Refer to Section 7 3 for the CPU response monitoring timer value Example 1 TCP split transmission count for communication on the same line The Maximum Segment size is
258. ot execute test Monitoring Make text file Stop monitor Execute test 11 36 11 36 11 TR BLESH TIN PUPL OOIE MELSEC Q 2 Turn off the COM ERR LED In the Setting value field of the COM ERR LED OFF request select Being requested and click the Execute test button Monitor Test Module information Module model GJ71MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value LED ON status Lit INIT status status COM ERR status COM ERR LED OFF request Not requested fiBergrequested gt X Y Monitor test i CONCI MODUS device assignment parameter EE snl pm Automatic communication condition Automatic communication Error log Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input displ Ee Setting range Make text file Not requested Being requested Monitoring Stop monitor Execute test 3 Confirm the COM ERR LED is turned off When the processing is completed a Completed message appears Confirm that the Current value field of COM ERR status has changed from Lit to Not lit Monitor Test Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module INIT status status Nott _ COM ERR status erg Being requested X Y Monitor test ES
259. parameter setting 9 1 I O signals for setting 9 1 Setting method 9 1 Setting precautions 9 3 Timing charts for 9 2 Basic 7 6 Basic parameter error code storage area 11 13 Basic parameter screen 8 29 Basic parameter starting method 6 12 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter 8 22 Buffer memory 3 4 Buffer memory addresses used for PING j CERE RE 11 40 EE 7 25 Coil assignment 1 7 26 COM ERR LED 11 33 Common operations of GX Configurator MB nC 8 5 Communication condition setting 6 12 Communication status 8 26 Connection 6 6 Connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX 6 6 Connection to 6 6 Connector applicable for external wiring 3 1 Control keys ssssssssssseeeenee 8 5 CPU response monitoring timer value 7 17 Data transmission 3 1
260. plicable base unit The QJ71MT91 can be mounted in any I O slot 3 of the base unit Always take account of the power supply capacity when mounting the QJ71MT91 since it may be insufficient depending on the other modules used with the QJ71MT91 or the number of mounted modules 3 Limited to within the I O point range of the CPU module and network module remote I O station 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 3 Compatibility with multiple CPU system The QJ71MT91 can be used in a multiple CPU system When using the QJ71MT91 in a multiple CPU system first refer to the QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals a Intelligent function module parameters The intelligent function module parameters must be written only to the 2 control CPU of the QU71MT91 4 Compatible software packages The compatibility between the systems that use the QJ71MT91 and the software packages is as shown below GX Developer is required to start up the system that uses the QU71MT91 ill EE Software Version GX Developer 1 GX Configurator MB QO0J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system ersion 7 or later Multiple CPU system Q02 Q02H Q06H Single CPU system Multiple CPU system Version 1 004 or later Single CPU system Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system When mounted to MELSECNET H remote I O tati Version 6 01B or later station 1 Refer to Section 2 3 for the accessible range of GX Developer 2 SYSTEM C
261. plications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications Microsoft Windows Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is the registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company names and product names used in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of respective owners afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation framee com MITSUBI
262. ports the following two dedicated instructions 1 MBRW instruction Reads writes MODBUS device data from to a slave This enables slave data to be read out to the PLC CPU device memory or PLC CPU data to be written to the slave 2 MBREQ instruction Can issue user desired request message format function code 1 data unit to a slave 1 Refer to Chapter 4 for the function code QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device Master function Holding register Device memory Request message holding register 400500 read request 400500 1234 Response message holding register 400500 1234H 1234 Ethernet 1 OVERVIEW PLC CPU Sequence program needed i MELSEC Q 2 Supporting slave function of MODBUS TCP communication The QJ71MT91 supports the slave function of MODBUS communication which is an open network system for factory automation and it is compatible with various MODBUS TCP master devices hereafter abbreviated to the masters of other manufacturers The slave function supports the following two functions QJ71MT91 Slave function MODBUS TCP MODBUS device assignment parameters Automatic response function The QJ71MT91 can automatically respond to a request message received from the master A sequence program for the slave function is not needed MODBUS device assignment function Using the MODBUS
263. quest current value The COM ERR LED OFF request current value must be as shown below COM ERR LED OFF request current value Not requested Monitor Test Module information Module model name GJ71MTS1 Start 120 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module EEEEEMK Z2 LED ON status INIT status Sh i I ___ sie MODEUSRR device assignment parameter UM Basic MODBUSIR device Automatic communication condition Automatic communication Flash ROM setting Details Current value Select input display Monitoring Setting range Not requested Being requested Make text file Stop monitor 11 38 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IE MELSEC Q 11 4 2 Program example for use of sequence program This section explains how to turn off the COM ERR LED from a sequence program 1 Relationship between COM ERR LED and I O signals Upon occurrence of a communication error the COM ERR LED COM ERR LED ON status signal X1B ON on the front of the QJ71MT91 turns ON 1 in the figure a Turn ON the COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y1B to turn OFF the COM ERR LED 2 in the figure COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y1B LED ON ON 1 COM ERR LED ON status signal X1B Error occurrence b While the COM ERR LED OFF request signal Y1B is ON OFF request processing is performed continuously 3 in the figure c The error informati
264. quest message acceptable GX Developer connectable 7 PARAMETER SETTIN au MELSEC Q 7 PARAMETER SETTING This chapter explains the settings of the parameters 7 1 Parameter Settings and Setting Procedure 1 Parameter types To use the QJ71MT91 set the following parameters as necessary a Basic parameters Set the basic information necessary for the QJ71MT91 When using the preset initial values of the QJ71MT91 no setting is required Refer to Section 7 2 for details b Automatic communication parameters Set the automatic communication parameters when using the automatic communication function with the QJ71MT91 acting as the master Refer to Section 7 3 for details c MODBUS device assignment parameters Set the MODBUS device assignment parameters when using the MODBUS device assignment function with the QJ71MT91 acting as a slave When using the preset initial values of the QJ71MT91 no setting is required Refer to Section 7 4 for details 2 Parameter setting method Set the parameters to the QJ71MT91 by any of the following methods a Setting from utility package Set the parameters from the GX Configurator MB utility package Refer to Chapter 8 for details b Setting from sequence program Set the parameters from the sequence program Refer to Chapter 9 for details 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 3 Parameter setting procedures Set the parameters in the following procedures
265. r Test Screen Monitor Test Module information Module model name QJ 1MTS1 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBUS R Module Setting item Current value Setting value EJ MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Switch 1 Operation mode setting status Online Switch 2 Communication condition setting status Basic parameter starting method MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method Default parameter Default parameter Online change enable disable Disable Send frame specification Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status Ethernet v2 0 Module READY Accessible Flash ROM setting Make text file Stop monitor Monitor Test Items Details Monitoring Cannot execute test Execute test Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Test It 0 itch 1 Operation mode setting status 3072 Basic Basic parameter starting method saring method Switch 2 condition setting Ducere mE starting method status Online REM enable disable Send frame Send frame specification ication Switch 0C02H to 0 Local station IP add tti tat ocal station IP address setting status ECUR to 3075 Module READY Watch dog timer error Intelligent functi 0 01 unction Section 6 6 3073 module switch setting status Section 11 1 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Buffer Memory Refe
266. r code is also stored into the buffer memory to identify the cause in detail The error code can be confirmed in the error log area address CFEH to DFFH of the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 1 8 for details of the error log area Refer to Section 11 3 3 for details of the error codes 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IE MELSEC Q 11 3 3 Error code list When an error occurs in any processing of the QJ71MT91 the error code is stored into its buffer memory This section explains the error details and corrective actions to be taken at error occurrence The Occurrence field of the following error code table indicates that each of the errors may occur when 1 The PLC is powered ON or the basic parameters are set 2 Master function is on 3 Slave function is on 4 GX Developer connection function is on or 5 During PING test or unit test Refer to the User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection of the CPU module 8 to Error code issued by PLC CPU 4FFFH The setting of the intelligent 7301 Switch 1 error module switch 1 operation mode setting is incorrect The setting of the intelligent 73024 Switch 2error module switch 2 communication condition setting is incorrect Switch 3 4 The setting of the intelligent function module switch 3 4 IP intelligent function module switch address setting is incorrect 3 4 The eenihg orthetael
267. r completed X06 Automatic communication operation status a5 Automatic communication error status X08 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed X09 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed o MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence X1B COM ERR LED status PINGtestcompleted ooo do i X1F Watch dogtimereror SS d _ 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 2 Y Output signals To test an output signal select the item in the Setting value column and click the Execute test button Buffer Memory Reference Monitor Test Item 1 Address Section 01 Basic parameter setting request E 04 Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request MoG Automaticcommunicaionstoprequest Secton821 08 MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y1B COM ERR LED OFF request o 1 PING testexecution request 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q 8 6 2 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter condition Monitor Purpose Monitor the setting status of the basic parameters and MODBUS device assignment parameters Starting Procedure Monitor Test screen Basic MODBUS R device Monitor Screen Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter con
268. r connectable XAH Function executability 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q b When the basic parameter starting method is ON start with the user set parameters and the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method is OFF start with the default parameters Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 2 gt b1 starting method MODBUS device assignment parameter 0 Start with the default parameters Communication starting conditions QJ71MT91 operation Basic parameter starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters Default parameter setting e MODBUS device assignment parameters Module READY X0 Basic parameter Basic parameter creation setting request Y1 Basic parameter setting normal X1 2 completed o 5 Basic parameter x3 Power S OFF MODBUS device then 9 assignment parameter ON setting request PLC MODBUS device CPU S assignment parameter reset G X8 a setting normal completed MODBUS Gdevice assignment parameter setting existence Automatic communication function Master function Dedicated instruction Master function Slave function F3 Function executability GX Developer connection 6
269. r give it hard impact 2 Tighten the module fixing screws in the following torque range Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw 36 to 48N cm normally unnecessary screw The module can be easily fixed to the base unit with the hook at top of the module In the operating environment where high vibration and or strong impact is observed however it is recommended to fix the module with the module fixing screws 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING 6 2 Pre Operational Procedures and Setting A rough procedure for operation is shown below Pre operational procedures Mount the QJ71MT91 to the base unit Connect GX Developer and QCPU with the cable Run a self loopback test Set the intelligent function module switches using GX Developer Y Connect the Ethernet cable to the QJ71MT91 and connect it to the network Set the operation mode to Online using GX Developer v When using dedicated instructions to make communication create a sequence program for communication Y Write the set parameters etc to the PLC CPU and reset the PLC CPU Conduct a PING test to confirm connection with the target device Conduct a hardware test MELSEC Q ZEILE Refer to Section 11 5 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q IMPORTANT 1 When setting parameters do not write any data to the System area use prohi
270. r of 0 to 64 279 connections 0118 to 0104 280 to 468 Preferred node specification 2 to 64 Same as Preferred node specification 1 1 When specifying a value of 32768 8000H or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 7 PARAMETER SETTIN Su MELSEC Q 7 2 2 TCP UDP IP setting 1 TCP UDP IP monitoring timer a TCP ULP timer value 1 Set the ACK monitoring time for opening TCP connection and sending data If no ACK has been received from the target device for a predetermined period of time the connection is forcibly closed 2 No setting is required when the default value is used b TCP zero window timer value 1 The window indicates the receive buffer on the receiving side 2 When the receive buffer on the receiving side becomes full window size 0 data transmission is held until the receive buffer has free space In such a case the sender sends a window check packet to the receiver according to the TCP zero window timer value to check whether data can be received or not 3 No setting is required when the default value is used c TCP resend timer value 1 Set the resend time for the case where ACK is not returned when TCP connection is opened and TCP data are transmitted This timer is also used for the time for resending an ARP request in the case where a response is not returned in reply to the sent ARP request ARP is resent at the TCP resend timer value
271. r s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi
272. ram example for use of sequence program 11 5 Conducting PING Test to Check QU71MT91 Connection sse 11 40 11 5 1 From Configurator MB sssssssssssssssesee enne 11 41 11 5 2 Program example for use of sequence program sese 11 45 APPENDICES App 1 to App 8 Appendix 1 External Dimensions nennen nennen APP 1 Appendix 2 Processing TIMO Fa AE nnne 2 Appendix GX Developer Connection Setup Example sss APP 5 INDEX Index 1 to Index 4 Conformation to the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction For details on making Mitsubishi PLC conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction when installing it in your product please see Chapter 3 EMC Directive and Low Voltage Instruction of the User s Manual Hardware of the CPU module to use The CE logo is printed on the rating plate on the main body of the PLC that conforms to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction Note the following when making this product to conform to the EMC directive and low voltage instruction 1 Twisted pair cable Use shielded twisted pair cables for connecting to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX connectors For the shielded twisted pair cables strip a part of the outer cover
273. rameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 and stores error code and parameter setting result when setting fails MELSEC Q 9 PROGRAMMING MODBUS device assignment parameter setting MELSEC Q device parameter setting normal completed X9 MODBUS device parameter setting error completed J_ Turns OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 when setting is completed normally RST Y8 Turns OFF MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 and stores error code and parameter setting result when setting fails UON MOVP 93091 D9004 UON MOVP 63092 D9005 UOV MOVP 63093 D9006 M2 Xo 00 m FMOVP 62304 HOFF Initializes MODBUS device Parameter Module X Basic assignment parameter setting setting READY parameter command setting ates existence For coil assignment 1 1 Wiha PSN UE CSOs i MOVP H9D G2304 Device code UOY MOVP H100 62305 Head device number UO MOVP KO 62306 Head coil number T U0 MOVP 512 2307 Assignment points For input register assignment 1 Uae A et ee ees Teoh OF 1 T MOVP H0A8 G2432 Device code i i i UO MOVP K3500 62433 Head device number 1 1 0 MOVP K3499 62434 Head input register number i i Uo i 1 MOVP K5500 G2435 Assignment points For holding register assignment UU roe we eral MOVP HOFO00 82496 Device code i UO MOVP H5500 92497 He
274. ration status is cleared at the following timing 1 When a normal response message from the slave is received in reply to the request message from the master is stored into only the bit corresponding to the automatic communication parameter 2 When the automatic communication function has stopped O is stored into all bits 3 When the PLC CPU is reset or the PLC is powered OFF and then ON 0 is stored into all bits e Interlock with a target device The automatic communication operation status storage area can be used as an interlock signal for a target device error Here is a program example 1 Program condition The QJ71MT91 is mounted in slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 0 and the automatic communication parameter 1 is used 2 Program example Command signal U0 G3104 0 Processing with data read from target device 4 by automatic communication parameter 1 1 11 15 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN AL MELSEC Q 7 Automatic communication function error code storage area a When an error occurs in the automatic communication function the error code corresponding to the automatic communication parameter 1 to 64 is stored in this area b When the automatic communication function operation status bit turns ON the error code is stored into the corresponding area c The automatic communication function error code storage area is not cleared The error code is overwritten when
275. rations of the QJ71MT91 send receive QJ71MT91 status check function tunetei Hardware test Tests the RAM and ROM of the QJ71MT91 Section 6 5 1 Tests the send receive functions and hardware of the Self loopback test Section 6 5 2 QJ71MT91 Use of the utility package GX Configurator MB allows easy parameter settings the basic parameters and Various settings using utility package d Chapter 8 automatic communication parameters and status monitoring 5 FUNCTIONS 5 2 Master Function MELSEC Q This section explains the functions of the QJ71MT91 as a master of MODBUS TCP 5 2 1 Automatic communication function The automatic communication function allows device read write request messages to be automatically issued from the QU71MT91 to the MODBUS TCP compatible slave devices Ethernet g __ lt gt MODBUS TCP slave device RC Third party remote I O etc Holding register Auto refresh N PLC CPU QU71MT91 Master function SO eo M Third party sensor etc Device memory Buffer memory EN 100ms read Holding register 250ms read 1000ms read 100ms write slave device Third party PLC em ocu exer oc Holding register MODBUS device read write request messages are issued to the slave repeatedly at specified intervals To use aut
276. re Qn H Parameter 1 assignment setting screen PLC name PLC system PLC fie PLC RAS Device Program Boot file SFC 1 0 assignment Set the following to the slot where the QJ71MT91 140 Assignment is mou nted Modelname Ponts x m x Type Select Intelli XXE Model name Enter the model name of the module Points Select 32 points Assigning the 1 0 address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Start XY Enter the head O number of the Leaving this setting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting QJ71 MT91 B di i pn Detailed setting Specify the control CPU of the Mio QU71MT91 in a multiple CPU 8 Slot Default system 12 Slot Default JSettings should be set as same when Import Multiple CPU Parameter Read PLC data using multiple CPU Acknowledge assignment Multiple CPU settings Default Check End Cancel Syjteh setting for UD and intelligent function module 2 Intelligent function module switch setting screen Inputfomat HEX Click the Switch setting button on the I O ich Switch 3 Switch 4S assignment setting screen to display the screen shown on the left Referring to 1 to 4 in this section make switch setting Entering the values in hexadecimal makes the setting easy Change the input format into HEX before entering the values
277. rence Monitor Test Items Address Section lt status 0 05 Module status LED ON status E status Section 11 2 E status 3077 COM ERR status ERR status COM ERR OFF request 1 Section 11 4 1 XYMontoestC2 Section 8 6 1 Basic MODBUS device assignment parameter condition 2 Section862 Automatic communication condition 2 Section 8 6 3_ Emreg 2 Section 8 6 4 Communication status 0 Section 8 6 5 Pinc teste o T Secton889 1 For the COM ERR OFF request select the corresponding request in the Setting value column Refer to Section 11 4 1 for details 2 To move to the corresponding sub screen click the button in the Setting value column Common specifications of Monitor Test screens including sub screens The following explains the specifications common to the screens 1 Display data Setting item Displays the I O signals and buffer memory area names Current value Monitors the current I O signal statuses and current values of the buffer memory areas Setting value Enter or select the data to be written by test operation 2 Command buttons Current value display Displays the current value of the selected item This is provided to confirm the characters that cannot be displayed in the Current value column however this package has no such items Make text file Creates a file of screen data in a text file format Start monitor Stop monitor Selects
278. reset the CPU Section 6 6 is completed Check the network cable specifications Confirm the specifications of the used Section 3 1 i network cable Check whether data has reached the Conduct a PING test to check the target device target device status and line status If the data has not reached the target device check the route and line status Section 7 2 and take corrective action if necessary Section 11 5 When data is sent via a router check the routing information settings of the QJ71MT91 and target device Check the target device Take corrective action if the target Check for errors device has any problem Check whether the target device is ready for operation Check whether the target device is attempting to communicate with the QJ71MT91 Check the line status Correct the line status if it has any problem in traffic Check for any TCP connection Check that the target device is disconnected automatically by the operating normally Section 5 4 KeepAlive function Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value Section 7 2 and KeepAlive interval timer value Check if the number of TCP connections Retry as TCP connections may fail connected simultaneously is within 64 temporarily TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be disconnected automatically when the Section 3 1 connection resources become Section 7 2 insufficient Specify the nodes as preferred ones when necessary
279. rget device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Review the TCP ULP timer value of the basic parameter Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while In the preferred node specification specify the target device with which communication is made frequently Decrease the number of TCP connections used simultaneously Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Continued on next page 11 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error m gt Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code Emme IP address setting error Connection not open TCP connection forcibly disconnected 7480H to System error 75FFH 11 35 The host address bits of the IP address of the request message transmission desti
280. rite request message was eee Online change Turn ON b2 of the intelligent 7394u VINE received in an online change COM ERR function module switch 2 disable status communication condition setting to enable the online change Review the contents of the The contents of the MBAP MBAP header request message on the master 7395H header in the received request COM ERR error side from which the request message are incorrect message was sent The QJ71MT91 received request messages that exceed Retry after a little while on the Slave function 7396H Bus the number of simultaneously COM ERR master side from which the u d receivable request messages request message was sent 64 test are incorrect An error was detected in the Recheck the installation status 990k RAM error RAM test ERR of the module and execute the ROM error An error was detected in the test again ROM test f the error occurs again the ERR cause is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 Please contact your local Self loopback An error was detected in the Mitsubishi service center or COM ERR test error self loopback test representative explaining a detailed description of the problem In the offline mode parameters In the offline mode delete GX were set by GX Configurator COM ERR Configurator MB parameters set The settings communication PING test time check transmission Review the settings of the PING 73B1H C
281. ror is the hardware fault of the QU71MT91 When an error occurs the error code is stored into the error log area address CFEu to CFFu of the buffer memory in the QU71MT91 Using GX Developer confirm the error code and take corrective action Refer to Section 11 2 and 11 3 When the self loopback test results in an error run the test again If the error occurs again its possible cause is the hardware fault of the QJ71MT91 Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 6 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting Setting purpose Set the operation mode communication condition IP address and or station No Starting procedure for intelligent function module switch setting screen 1 Start GX Developer 2 Double click Parameter in the project window of GX Developer and double click PLC parameter 3 Click the lt lt I O assignment gt gt tab and click the Switch setting button The Switch seting for and intelligent function module screen is displayed Switch setting for 1 0 and intelligent function module Input format HEX Sit Modelname Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 He EUER RSS Ia LARES RN 1 oeo met oJziMTS coae 0001 10 1 E Operation procedu
282. rs set OFF No parameters set YB TEE Le EE MINES Use prohibited EE COM ERR LED status ON Lit OFF Not lit COM ERR LED OFF request Section ON Belna recuostad Section 11 4 2 dise ies 1142 OFF Not requested PING test completed Section ON PING test completed 11 5 2 OFF Use prohibited ES Watch dog timer error Section ON Module error occurred 111 OFF Module operating normally Important Among the I O signals for the PLC CPU do not output turn ON the Use X10 Y17 PING test execution request VIC ON PING test execution being Section requested 11 5 2 OFF PING test execution not request EN prohibited signals Doing so may cause the PLC system malfunction 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q 3 3 Applications and Assignment of Buffer Memory 3 3 1 Buffer memory list A buffer memory list is given below Read Initial SPEI i o 1 o TCP ULP timer value 3C 60 Set time set value 500ms zero window timer value 14 20 1 Set time set value 500ms 0002 TCP resend timer value 2 Set time set value 500ms 144 20 0003 monitoring end timer value S timer 9 Settime set value 500ms 2840 0004 IP reassembly timer value 400 RW 4 Set time set value X 500ms 0005 Split reception monitoring timer 5 H value 3C4 60 R W Set time set value
283. rt N start oy Start E timer A A KeepAlive Start Timeout Start Timeout stan timer i i Y Y Y Y Message Message Message Message Message A A messa MIDI Ee must age guess D esee E ges A MODBUS TCP Message Message Message Error Me Mes Sage 5 FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 5 5 Router Relay Function 1 Router relay function The router relay function enables data communications with slave devices connected to other Ethernets via routers and gateways 2 To use router relay function To use the router relay function set the routing relay function of the basic parameter to Used Default Not used The following basic parameters are available for the router relay function Subnet mask pattern Default router IP address Number of routers set Router information Change the default values set to the basic parameters as necessary Refer to Section 7 2 for details of the routing information QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP Master function slave device 4 5 Router 2 Ethernet Default router Ethernet MODBUS TCP slave device 3 MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP slave device 1 slave device 2 1 When the slave function of the QJ71MT91 is used to communicate with the master device on another Ethernet communication can be made without use o
284. s 1 to 32767 KeepAlive interval timer value Set time set value 500ms 1 to 32767 KeepAlive resend count 1 to 10 000 to 000CH 11 to 12 0000 to 000 13 to 14 000FH 15 0010 to 00114 16 to 17 0012 to 0013H 18 to 19 0014 to 002 20 to 47 Routing information Router relay function 0 Not used 1 Used Subnet mask pattern 0000000 to FFFFFFOOH Default router IP address Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 00000000 Number of routers set 0to8 Subnet address Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 e 00000000 Router information 1 Router IP address Refer to Section 7 2 2 3 f 000000001 Router information 2 to 8 Same as router information 1 7 PARAMETER SETTIN suos MELSEC Q 2 GX Developer connection information setting Setting Range_ Initial Value 0030H 48 Number of TCP connections for GX Developer connection 3 MODBUS setting Address Parameter Name Setting Range Initial Value 1 to 4999 Local slave station port No 5020 to 655356 Target slave port No for automatic communication function 1 to 65535 1 CPU response monitoring timer value 1 to 2400 Set time set value x 500ms 0115 to 0116H Refer to Section IP address 00000000 277 to 278 7 2 4 4 6 Preferred node specification 1 0117 Numbe
285. s OOOOH to 0104 of the buffer memory 2 Turn on Basic parameter setting request Y1 2 I O signals used for basic parameter setting Use the following I O signals for basic parameter setting Signal Name Module READY ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting normal completed ON Normal completed OFF Basic parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Basic parameter settting existence ON Parameters set OFF No parameters set Basic parameter setting request ON Being requested OFF Not requested 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 3 Timing charts for basic parameter setting a When setting is completed normally asic parameter etting normal ompleted 0 Qn Basic parameter creation Parameter creation Module READY OFF Basic parameter OFF setting request Basic parameter OFF setting normal X1 4 completed i wet Basic parameter OFF y setting error WE SS ee e completed gt Basic parameter OFF setting existence N E Error code clear Basic parameter error code storage area gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program b When setting is completed with an error Basic parameter Basic parameter setting error etting normal completed Qn Parameter creation Basic parameter arameter creatio creation error
286. s available Though not required the use of the utility package allows on screen initial settings basic parameters automatic communication parameters MODBUS device assignment parameters and auto refresh settings reducing sequence programs and also facilitating the confirmation of the setting and operating statuses 1 1 It is recommended to use the utility package with the QU71MT91 By making various parameter settings with the utility package communication can be made without sequence programs 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the system configuration of the QJ71MT91 2 1 Applicable System This section indicates applicable systems 1 Applicable modules and number of modules The following table indicates the CPU modules and network modules for remote station that accept the QU71MT91 and the number of modules that can be mounted Max Number of QOOJCPU QOOCPU x1 24 modules Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU 64 modules CPU module Applicable in the Q mode ly G1 Q12HCPU onus ert Q25HCPU 64 modules x1 Q25PHCPU QJ72LP25 25 Network module QJ72LP25GE 64 modules QJ72BR15 MELSECNET H remote I O station 2 x1 Refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of the used CPU module 2 Refer to the Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O Network 2 Ap
287. s of the MODBUS standard functions 1 Precautions for specifying device number in message When specifying a device number in a message specify device number 1 However it does not apply to the file number and device number specified for Read Write file record Example When the status of input 32 100032 is read with Read discrete inputs FC 02 Function code Head input number Read points Function code 02H 001FH 0001 When reading the status of input 32 100032 specify 31 001 as the head input number The device number stored in the response message is actually read written device number 1 2 Overview of request response message format given in this section a Request response message format diagram The following indicates the overview of the request response message format diagram given in Section 4 3 1 and later Area name Function code Frame contents 3 Function code Head coil number Read points Request message format 000044 potatoe ee Setting range Response message format Value stored in response message zd 1 byte 1 byte eee When 2 bytes comprise 1 data the high 8 bits 8 bits order byte 8 bits are represented as H and the low order byte 8 bits as L b Response message format The format of a response message issued by the slave to the master differs depending on whether the processing in the slave has
288. se message with Read holding registers FC 03 is received Received response message frame Function code Function code Number of read Device data Device data bytes 1 2 04H 2 00H 05 Receiving order 6 bytes Contents stored in response message storing devices and their order As described on the left Response message size 6 bytes Response message 34H 12H Received data storage order Response message is stored in order of low order to high order bytes starting at the lowest device number 1 The setting side is as described below User Data are set by the user before dedicated instruction execution System The PLC CPU stores the result of dedicated instruction execution 2 The number of read bytes is 4 from 2 Read points X 2 4 1 The received response message data are stored in order of L low order to H high order bytes starting at the lowest device number of the response message storing devices D1 1 to D1 n 2 When the response message size is an odd number the last high byte of the response message storing device is overwritten by 0 10 14 10 14 10 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Function MELSEC Q To the slave specified by the Target IP address of the control data the request message can be sent using any given PDU protocol data unit format A maximum of eight MBREQ instructions can be executed simultaneously An
289. sic parameters on the basic parameter screen Starting Procedure Initial setting screen Basic parameter Setting Screen Basic parameter Madule information Module model name QJ 71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBLIS R Module Seti viu TCP UDP IP setting TCP ULP timer value Units 500ms TCP zero window timer value Units 500ms TCP resend timer value Units 500ms TCP end timer value Units 500ms IP reassembly timer value Units 500ms Split reception monitoring timer value Units 500ms Keep live start timer value Units 500ms Details Decimal input Setting range 2 2400 Make text file End setup 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Setting Items For the basic parameter setting set the data format or setting range value of each item in the Setting value column and click the End setup button to save the set values Buffer Memory Reference Setting Item Address Section 0000 TCP ULP timer value 0 0001 1 0002 2 0003 TCP zero window timer value TCP UDP IP TCP resend timer value monitoring timer TCP end timer value 3 0004 reassembly timer value 4 0005 5 0006 KeepAlive 6 Split reception monitoring timer value 0007 7 0008 8 0009 9 000 10 000 to 000 Subnet mask pattern 11 to 12 Keep
290. signment parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device MODBUS device Parameter creation assignment assignment parameter parameter creation error correction ON OFF Module READY Basic parameter OFF setting existence MODBUS device OFF assignment _ Y8 parameter setting request MODBUS device OFF assignmen x8 parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device OFF assignmen x9 parameter setting 1 yu error completed p MODBUS device OFF assignmen XA 7 parameter setting existence MODBUS device assignmen 0C13x parameter error code storage area P Error code and setting result clear Error code and setting result storage MODBUS device assignmen parameter setting 0C14 to 15 result storage area BI Diet gt Executed by QJ71MT91 Executed by sequence program 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Precautions for MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 8 When setting the MODBUS device assignment parameters with a sequence program set the MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method of the intelligent function module switch setting refer to Section 6 6 to ON Start with the user set parameters Turn ON MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 after Module READY and Basic parameter setting existence have turned
291. specifications for the setting target QU71MT91 192 1 0 1 Remote master station Station No 0 v F MELSECNET H Remote I O network Network No 1 Setting target 1 1 Remote VO station QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP master device Station No 1 192 1 0 1 192 1 0 3 v GX Developer o Ethernet QJ71MT91 QJ71MT91 MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 5 192 1 0 6 192 1 0 2 1 This QJ71MT91 is assumed to be mounted in Slot 0 of the base unit with the head I O No set to 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q a Automatic communication function The setting target QJ71MT91 192 1 0 1 and MODBUS TCP slave device 192 1 0 2 communicate with each other using the automatic communication function Set the automatic communication parameters to the setting target QJ71MT91 Communication details MELSECNET H remote master station du D4003 D4008 D4071 D4092 D4095 D4096 D4159 D5000 W1388 Output data Output data 2 D5099 W13EB PLC CPU MELSECNET H Automatic communication operation status storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Automatic communication operation status storage area Input data
292. t MOV D4008 M330 M331 D4000 1 SET REMFR REMFR instruction instruction completion result 04009 RST Automatic comm error status 04000 0 Me RST X1007 RST Automatic comm error status D4000 1 y RST 0 K3 K1 HO K3104 D4000 K72 M330 M331 Take corrective action for error completion referring to Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference REMFR REMFR Manual Remote I O Network instruction instruction completion result Refresh processing Automatic communication function buffer output area X1000 X1006 M310 Module Automatic READY comm instruction operation completion status 0 3 42 REMTO K4 HO W310 M311 REMTO REMTO instruction instruction L completion result K14848 D5000 4 0 K100 M310 REMTO instruction completion Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote Network gt MELSEC Q Turns ON External output Y40 when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 1 is invalid Turns ON External output Y41 when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Acquires error code when automatic communication parameter 2 is invalid Turns OFF External output Y40 when automatic communication is normal Turns OFF automatic communication operation status for automatic
293. t parameters exist f The basic parameter setting is not allowed in the offline mode intelligent function module switch 1 00014 Set the basic parameters in the online mode intelligent function module switch 1 00004 Refer to Section 6 6 1 for details of whether each function can be executed or not depending on the basic parameter setting existence 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 1 2 Automatic communication parameter setting 1 Automatic communication parameter setting method Make automatic communication parameter setting in the following procedure 1 Store the parameters into the automatic communication parameter area address 0200 to O4FFH of the buffer memory 2 Turn ON Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 2 I O signals for automatic communication parameter setting Use the following I O signals for automatic communication parameter setting Signal Name Module READY ON Accessible OFF Inaccessible Basic parameter setting existence ON Parameter set OFF No parameters set Automatic communication parameter setting normal completed ON Normal completed OFF Automatic communication parameter setting error completed ON Error completed OFF Automatic communication operation status ON Operating OFF Stopped Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request ON Parameter setting being requested start bein
294. t MODBUS device head 0 to 65535 1 number Access points 2 0 to 1968 020 to Automatic O4FFH communication Same as in automatic communication parameter 1 524 to 1279 parameter 2 to 64 Read setting Write setting 1 When specifying a value of 32768 8000 or more in a sequence program set the value in hexadecimal 2 The setting range and default value of the access points change depending on the target MODBUS device type Refer to 8 in this section 7 PARAMETER SETTING MELSEC Q 1 Target station IP address 2 3 a Setthe IP address of the target slave device b When the target slave device is on another Ethernet and an access is to be made via a router set the router relay function of the basic parameter to 1 Used and set the routing information of the basic parameter Refer to Section 7 2 for the routing information c Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 The host address bits are not all 0 or all 1 Module ID a Set the module ID when specifying the slave connected to the other line such as a line using the MODBUS Serial protocol b The module ID is embeded into a request message to be sent to a target slave device Refer to Section 4 2 for the frame specifications of the request message Repeat interval timer value a The repeat interval timer value represents the time from
295. t function module switch setting 1 When GX Configurator MB is used for parameter setting When GX Configurator MB is used to make parameter setting set the basic parameter and MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods to ON Intelligent function module switch setting Switch 2 gt CNENGESNES 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter Basic parameter starting method starting method 1 Start with the user set parameters 1 Start with the user set parameters Communication starting conditions Default parameter Parameter setting setting not made i processing by GX i Configurator MB QJ71MT91 operation Module READY Basic parameter setting request Basic parameter setting normal x1 completed Basic parameter x3 existence MODBUS device assignment parameter yg setting request MODBUS device assignment parameter setting normal completed MODBUS device assignment parameter setting existence Parameter setting operation Automatic communication Not startable Startable function Master function Dedicated instruction Master function Slave function GX Developer connection Function executability GX Developer not connectable GX Developer connectable 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC
296. t message from the master in this setting the slave QJ71MT91 issues the exception code 04 When corresponding bit is ON Data write is enabled while the PLC CPU is in RUN status d Send frame specification Bit 3 Specify the frame format in which the QJ71MT91 will send data to the target device When corresponding bit is OFF Data are sent in the Ethernet V2 0 compliant frame When corresponding bit is ON Data are sent in the IEEE802 3 compliant frame 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 3 IP address setting Switch 3 Switch 4 Set the IP address of the QU71MT91 on the local station IP address 192 1 0 254 J I b15 b8 b7 bO 615 b8 b7 Switch 3 Switch 4 gt Set the value that satisfies the following conditions Condition 1 The IP address class is any of A B and C Condition 2 All the host address bits are not 0 or 1 If the conditions are not satisfied a switch error 73031 will occur In such a case correct the switch setting and then switch the power OFF then ON or reset the PLC CPU 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q 6 6 1 Communication starting conditions depending on basic parameter MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method setting The communication starting conditions change depending on the combination of the basic parameter and MODBUS device assignment parameter starting methods in Switch 2 of the intelligen
297. t request Not requested 0000 Being requested X05 Automalic communication parameter setting error completed OFF X0B Automatic communication operation status Stopped XD7 Automatic communication error status lt 08 MODBUS R device assignment parameter No error OFF Automatic communication stop request Not requested Being requested Parameters 1 Automatic communication operating condition storage area Automatic communication error code storage area Normal Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Cannot execute test Execute test Refer to Section 8 6 1 8 18 Flash ROM setting Current value display Make text file Stop monitor Details Cannot execute test Execute test Monitoring Refer to Section 8 6 3 8 18 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB Error log Module information Module model name 0771 91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type X MODBUS R Module Current value Setting value Setting item I The error log is displayed in order of the latest error I Number of errors occurred No 1 Detailed error code Exception code Function code Local station port No Target IP address Target device port No 2 Detailed error code Exception code Function code x Flash ROM setting Details
298. tempted to be established As the TCP connection was cut off from the target device the response message via GX Developer connection could not be returned The send receive processing was forcibly interrupted by the basic parameter setting processing An error occurred in the TCP connection and the send receive processing was forcibly interrupted As the TCP connection was being closed the send receive processing was interrupted COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR MELSEC Q Error ae Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code Emme Deer COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR Do not turn on MODBUS device assignment parameter setting request Y8 in the offline mode Do not turn on PING test execution request Y 1C in the offline mode Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Increase the maximum number of TCP connections with the target node in the preferred node specification Decrease the number of connections simultaneously used with the target node Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Perform the basic parameter setting processing after the send receive processing is
299. ter setting normal completed SET 5 Automatic comm parameter setting error completed UON MOVP G3089 UOY MOVP G3090 H300 UO 6515 UO G516 UON G517 U0 G518 UON 6519 UO G520 UON 6526 UO 6527 UON G528 UON G529 UON G533 U0 G534 UO G535 MI Parameter setting command YA M2 Parameter setting command Y4 D9002 D9003 Initializes automatic communication parameter setting area Automatic communication ww s parameter 1 Read coils DMOVP H0C0010002 Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS device head number Access points Target station IP address Module ID Repeat interval timer value Response monitoring timer value Type specification of the target MODBUS device Head buffer memory address Target MODBUS device head number Access points Turns ON Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 Turns OFF automatic communication parameter setting command Turns OFF Automatic communication parameter setting request automatic communication start request Y4 when setting is completed normally Turns ON MODBUSS device assignment parameter setting command Turns OFF Automatic communication pa
300. ters The operations shown in Fig 5 1 are performed in the following steps 1 2 Operation from GX Developer Project Open existing project Save project Save project as Operation from parameter setting module selection screen of GX Configurator MB File Open file Save file Operation from GX Developer Online Read from PLC Write to PLC Intelligent function module parameter Operation can also be performed from GX Configurator MB parameter setting module selection screen Online Read from PLC Write to PLC 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q Text file gt A text file is created using the Make text file operation on the initial setting auto refresh setting or monitor test screen This file can be used for creating user documents GX Developer GX Configurator MB Personal computer QCPU Q25HCPU A Indicates intelligent function module parameters B Indicates data that have been saved by text file creation e USB RS 232 Fig 8 1 Interrelation of data created by GX Configurator MB 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB 8 3 2 Operation outline GX Developer screen E PROGRAM LD Edit mode MAIN 35 Step Wess Window Help Check program Merge data Check parameter Transfer ROM Delete unused comments Clear all parameters IC memory card SetTEL data 4 Intelligent Function
301. th functions can be operated bi directionally between QJ71MT91 and QJ71MT91 QJ71MTO1 QJ71MT91 Master slave function Master slave function Request i d message message Ethernet 4 Support of GX Developer connection via Ethernet GX Developer can be connected to Ethernet via the QJ71MT91 This enables the maintenance of the PLC CPU via Ethernet GX Developer A QJ71MT91 1 OVERVIEW S MELSEC Q Supporting Ethernet functions for more reliability high speed communication and flexible system construction The following Ethernet functions are supported for more reliability high speed communication and more flexible system construction a KeepAlive function The status of communication with the target device where a TCP connection has been established can be checked When communication is not made for a given period of time between the QJ71MT91 and the open target device the QJ71MT91 checks the target device for existence and cuts off unnecessary TCP connections b 100 Mbps high speed communication Supporting 100BASE TX the QJ71MT91 can make 100Mbps high speed communication c Router relay function Communication can be made with a MODBUS device via a router Ease of setting with utility package The optional utility package GX Configurator MB i
302. thout using utility package sess 9 22 9 3 Program Example for Use in MELSECNET H Remote I O Network 9 29 9 3 1 System configuration and program conditions sse 9 29 9 3 2 Program using utility Dackage eene rar rera regnat ro Geste ger uer ed 9 35 9 3 3 Program without using utility package sse nennen nennen 9 39 10 1 Dedicated Instruction List uay nnne nnne trennen nennen 10 1 10 2 MBRW Instruction veces ean cited vende ves e Ain e d v d diene nies 10 2 10 3 MBREQ Instruction dreuta aarden eia 10 11 11 1 Troubleshooting 3 2 eret ette rine n tret n t ie t etel rre 11 1 11 2 Confirming QU71MT91 11 10 TAS Error COGS 11 13 113 1 Error code storage areas ote tette gebeten geben ge utl teet 11 13 11 3 2JException code list tao ti adest 11 19 TOSENO code Reiten tee dente idus 11 21 11 4 Turning Off the COM ERR 11 36 8 8 11 4 1 From Configurator MB ssssssssssesseesssee enne netten 11 36 11 4 2 Prog
303. ting b Automatic communication parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 b for the automatic communication parameter setting c MODBUS device assignment parameters Refer to Section 9 2 2 2 c for the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting 3 Auto refresh setting Make auto refresh setting from the Auto refresh setting screen of GX Configurator MB Set the following items for the program example Module side Module side PLC side Setting Item Transfer word count Buffer offset Device Automatic communication function buffer input area 256 100n W1000 Automatic communication function buffer output area 2560 00 W1388 Automatic communication operating condition xm WOFFC Auto refresh setting Module information Module model name QJ71MT91 Start 1 0 No 0000 Module type MODBLIS R Module PLCside Device Module side Module side Module side Setting item Buffer size Transfer Buffer offset word count Transfer direction MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Automatic communication function buffer input area Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operating condition 1to 64 User free area input User free area output Make text file End setup Cancel 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 4 Network parameter setting Set the network parameters on Network parameter
304. tion 9 1 1 In the setting of intelligent function module switch 2 communication condition setting b0 Basic parameter Section 6 6 starting method select OFF Start with the default parameters Check if the basic parameter setting Refer to Basic parameter setting error This section error completed signal X2 is on completed signal X2 turned on 2 2 5 OPEN LED does When using the automatic Refer to Data cannot be transmitted to not turn on communication function slave device by automatic This section The SD LED does communication function Data cannot be 3 8 not flicker during received from slave device data transmission When using dedicated instruction Refer to Dedicated instruction is not This section The RD LED does executed 3 1 not flicker during When using slave function Refer to Slave function of QJ71MT91 This section data reception does not return response message to request message 3 3 When using GX Developer connection Refer to GX Developer cannot be This section connected 3 4 11 2 11 2 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN AL MELSEC Q 2 Troubleshooting of errors indicated by X signals Reference Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section READY Refer to RUN LED turned signal X0 turned off This section 2 Watch dog timer 1 1 error signal X1F turned on Basic parameter Refer to the basic parameter error code Take the corresponding corrective
305. to Automatic communication parameter setting error completed signal X5 turned on 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ae IL MELSEC Q Reference No Symptom Check Item Corrective Action Section 3 COM ERR LED Check if the MODBUS device Refer to MODBUS device assignment assignment parameter setting error parameter setting error completed This section 2 5 completed signal X9 is on signal X9 turned on e Check if the automatic communication Refer to the automatic communication error status signal X7 is on operation status storage area 0 20 to 0C234 identify the parameter number where the error occurred confirm the error code stored in the corresponding automatic communication error code storage area 0 28 to 0 67 or the exception code from the target slave and take corrective action Turn off the COM ERR LED When the dedicated instruction is used Refer to Dedicated instruction failed This section check it for an error Turn off the COM ERR LED 32 Check the error code in the error log Take the corresponding corrective action Section 11 3 Turn off the COM ERR LED Refer to Communication with target device cannot be made even though each This section parameter setting is completed 3 7 INIT LED does Check the basic parameter setting Set the basic parameters from GX Chapter 7 not turn on Configurator MB or from the sequence Chapter 8 Sec
306. tomatic communication parameter setting area MODBUS device assignment parameter setting area Intelligent function module U0 G2435 device U0 G2496 to U0 G2499 U0 G3088 Basic parameter error code storage area U0 G3089 Automatic communication parameter error code storage area U0 G3090 Automatic communication parameter setting result storage area U0 G3091 MODBUS device assignment parameter error code storage area U0 G3092 MODBUS device assignment Error device type arameter setting result storage area U0 G3104 to U0 G3107 U0 G3112 to U0 G3175 U0 G4096 to U0 G8191 U0 G12288 to ded e Automatic communication function buffer output area U0 G16383 Automatic communication operation status storage area parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication error code storage area parameter 1 to 64 Automatic communication function buffer input area 9 PROGRAMMING MELSEC Q 9 2 2 Program using utility package 1 Intelligent function module switch setting Set the intelligent function module switches by clicking on lt lt assignment of GX Developer For the program example set intelligent function module switches as described below Intelligent Function Setting Details Set Value Module Switch Switch 1 No need to set initial value online Basic parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters 60 1 MODBUS device assignment parameter starting method Start with the user set parameters b1
307. tus for an error Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an 7403 Send error A send error occurred COM ERR As the line may be busy retry after a little while Hardware fault Continued on next page 11 31 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error ct Occurrence Error Name Description Lit LED Corrective Action Code metam Deep o 7405 7420 11 32 Receive error Send error Broadcast address specification error Ethernet address error IP check sum error A receive error occurred COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR COM ERR The internal receive buffer has no free space A send error occurred The broadcast address was specified in TCP based transmission The Ethernet address of the target device is unknown GOMER COM ERR A check sum error was detected in the IP protocol Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Hardware fault Retry after a little while Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error Hardware fault Check whether the operation status of the target device is normal or not Check the line status for an error As the line may be busy retry after a little while Hardware fault Review the IP address s
308. ty N CAUTION Sufficient safety measures must be taken for 100 or 10BASE T installation work Consult with qualified networking specialists about the installation work including connection cable termination and trunk cable wiring e Use the connection cable which complies with the corresponding standard given in Section 3 1 Do not install the control and communication cables together with the main circuit and power cables etc Keep a distance of at least 100mm between them Failure to do so can cause a malfunction due to noise e The communication and power cables connected to the module must be placed in a duct or secured with clamps If the cables are not secured inadvertent tripping can cause damage to the module or cables or a malfunction e When disconnecting any of the communication and power cables connected to the module do not pull it by holding the cable part Disconnect the cable by holding the connector connected to the module Failure to do so can cause a malfunction or damage to the module or cable 2 Connection to 10BASE T 100BASE TX This section explains how to connect the QJ71MT91 to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX network A twisted pair cable connection diagram is shown below 6 PRE OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND SETTING MELSEC Q Operation procedures Step 1 Connect the twisted pair cable to the hub Step 2 Connect the twisted pair cable to the QJ71MT91 POINT 1 The QJ71
309. utomatically by the KeepAlive function Check if the number of TCP connections connected simultaneously is within 64 Check if the power was reapplied after replacement of the QJ71MT91 or target Check that the target device is Section 5 4 Section 7 2 operating normally Adjust the KeepAlive start timer value and KeepAlive interval timer value TCP connections may fail temporarily Retry the connection TCP connections with the nodes not specified as preferred ones may be closed automatically when the Section 7 2 connection resources become insufficient Reconnect and retry Specify the nodes as preferred ones when necessary Reapply the power of the QJ71MT91 or target device When the target device has the Ethernet address of the communication target continued communication may be disabled since the Ethernet address changed due to the replacement of the QJ71MT91 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Confirming QJ71MT91 Status This section explains how to confirm the QJ71MT91 status Method Reference Section System monitor screen of GX Developer This section 1 Monitor Test screen of GX Configurator MB This section 2 1 System monitor of GX Developer The module status of the QJ71MT91 can be confirmed from the system monitor a When confirming the module status and error code on the Module s Detailed Information screen of the diagnostic function Starting Procedure GX Developer Di
310. utput Make text file End setup Cancel Explanation 1 Display data a Setting items MELSEC Q Auto refresh Buffer Memory Setting Item Reference Section Address 4096 to 8191 Automatic communication function buffer input area 1000 to 1FFFH Eu to 16383 Eu to ESSA to 3107 ESSA to 0C23u Automatic communication function buffer output area Automatic communication operating condition 1 to 64 Section 5 2 1 20480 to 24575 User free area input output 50004 to Section 7 4 5 H H 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB MELSEC Q b Display items 1 Module side buffer size Displays the transferable buffer memory size of the setting item 2 Module side transfer word count Displays the number of words to be transferred 3 Module side buffer offset Displays the offset value of the buffer memory data to be transferred 4 Transfer direction indicates that data are written from the device to the buffer memory gt indicates that data are read from the buffer memory to the device 5 PLC side device Enter the CPU module side device to be refreshed automatically Available devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When using the bit device X Y M L or B set a number divisible by 16 e g X10 Y120 M16 Buffer memory data are stored into the devices of 16 points starting from the set device number For example when
311. values ON OFF stored into the device data 1 to n are written to the coils in order from low order to high order bits of the device data The number of points specified as the write points must be matched with the number of bits specified as the number of bytes For example when the write points are 16 set the number of bytes to 2 bytes 16 bits 2 Response message format Slave Master When completed normally Function code Function code Head coil number Write points The value same as in the head The value same as in the coil number in the request write points in the request message is stored message is stored H L L 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q When completed with an error Function code Function code Exception 8FH code When completed with an error the exception code and error code are stored into the buffer memory Refer to Section 11 3 for the storage location confirmation method and more details 4 MODBUS STANDARD FUNCTIONS MELSEC Q 4 3 8 Write multiple registers FC 16 Writes values to multiple holding registers Number of accessible devices with one message 1 to 123 points 1 Request message format Master Slave Function code Data Function code Head holding Write points Number Device data 1 Device data 109 register number n i of bytes 00004 to FFFFu 00014 to 007 2 1 0001 to OOF6x
312. values are stored to show the erroneous device type when the MODBUS device assignment parameter setting error completed X9 signal is ON Error devices and corresponding values Coil 0001 Input 0002H e Input register 0004H Holding register 0005H 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN MELSEC Q 6 Automatic communication operation status storage area a The operation statuses of the automatic communication function are stored in bit format in correspondence with the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 0 Operating normally OFF The case where the automatic communication parameters are not set is also included 1 Error occurred ON b The operation statuses are stored into the bit positions from low order to high order bits in order of the automatic communication parameters 1 to 64 bF bE bD bC bB bA b5 b4 b3 b2 bi bO v eepe TETT 0 22 47 s s EE E 37 JE ZH The numbers indicate the automatic communication parameter numbers 0C23 64 6 5 oo c The operation status is set at the following timing 1 When an exception message from the slave is received in reply to the request message from the master 1 is stored into only the bit corresponding to the automatic communication parameter 2 When a communication error has occurred 1 is stored into only the bit corresponding to the automatic communication parameter d The ope
313. whether to monitor the values in the current value column or not Execute test Tests the selected item Multiple items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl key Close Closes the currently open screen and returns to the previous screen 8 UTILITY PACKAGE GX CONFIGURATOR MB Monitor Test Module information Module model name 0 71 91 Module type Module Monitor Test screen Sub screen shift DER Start 1 0 No 0000 Module information Module model QJ71MT31 Module type MODBUS R Module Basic MODBUS R device assignment parameter condition MELSEC Q Start 1 0 No 0000 Setting item MODBUS is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric SA Current value Setting value Switch 1 Operation mode setting status Online Switch 2 Communication condition setting status Basic parameter starting method Default parameter MODBUS R device assignment parameter starting method Default parameter Online change enable disable Disable Send frame specification Ethemet V2 0 Switch 3 4 Local station IP address setting status 192 1 0 254 Setting item Current value Basic parameter setting existence Parameters set Selting value Basic parameter error code storage area M ODBUS R device assignment parameter setting existence Par
314. wns and malfunctions of the module e A protective sheet is pasted on the upper part of the module in order to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips to get inside the module while wiring Do not remove this protective sheet during wiring work However be sure to remove the protective sheet before operating the module to allow heat radiation during operation Setup and Maintenance Precautions 4 DANGER Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may cause electric shocks or malfunctions e Before cleaning the module or retightening the module mounting screws make sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply Failure to do so may cause the module to electric shocks breakdown or malfunction If the screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off N CAUTION e Please read the manual carefully and confirm the safety thoroughly before performing online operations especially parameter changes forced output data link status change for the module that is making data link Failure to do so may cause operation mistakes leading to damage to machines or accidents e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire e Before mounting or dismounting the module make sure to shut off all p
315. y instructions attempted in excess of the limit are ignored Create a sequence program so that the number of simultaneously executed MBREQ instructions does not exceed 8 The Q71MT91 automatically opens a TCP connection with a target slave when this instruction is executed Whether TCP connection closing processing is performed or not can be selected in Execution type S1 0 of the control data When communication with the same target device is made frequently using the dedicated instruction setting TCP connection is not closed after instruction completion saves the time required for TCP connection opening for the subsequent instruction execution Whether the MBREQ instruction is being executed or not and whether it is completed normally or not can be confirmed in the completion device D2 and completion status indication flag D2 1 specified in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBREQ instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing b Completion status indication device D2 1 Turns ON OFF depending on the status of the MBREQ instruction completion Normal completion Remains OFF Error completion Turns ON in the END processing of the scan where the MBREQ instruction is completed and turns OFF in the next END processing Operation for MBREQ instruction execution Sequence program instruction Completion device D2 Compl

MODBUS(R)/TCP Interface Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents